2024-09-10; City Council; 08; Monroe Street Pool Renovation and Replacement Project Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Appropriation of Construction Funding, and Authorization to Advertise — Carlsbad City Council, September 10, 2024 (part 4 of 11)

PULL SIDE
567
PERFORATED METAL PANEL (WHEREPANIC HARDWARE OCCURS ONLY) SEEPANIC HARDWARE VON DUPRIN SERIES 9824-F, 630 FINISH WITH SCHLAGE RIMCYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 AND I.C. CORE 20-740 6261" SQ. TUBE STEEL PICKETS. CENTERED ON TOP AND BOTTOM RAIL PERMANUFACTURER1-3/4" TUBE STEEL BOTTOM RAIL4" TUBULAR STEEL FENCE POSTFULL HEIGHT ASTRAGAL ATTACHEDTO GATENOT USEDGATE HARDWARE. SEE35143 6 08L5.081/2"MAX8 14- 8
NOTE:OPEN-MESH GATES WITH MAXIMUMLEAF SPAN OR ROLLING SECTION FORROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" & APEX HT.LESS THAN 8'-0" ABOVE LOWESTADJACENT GRADE ARE EXEMPT FROMWELDING SPECIAL INSPECTION.

TUBULAR STEEL CAP3"=1'-0"-
1/4" THICK STEEL PLATEBUTT WELDTUBE STEEL FENCE MEMBER12 12 3
31/8
NOTES:A.ALL COMPONENTS TO HAVE A SHOP APPLIEDPOLYURETHANE PAINT SYSTEM.B.OPEN-MESH GATES WITH MAXIMUM LEAF SPAN ORROLLING SECTION FOR ROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" &APEX HT. LESS THAN 8'-0" ABOVE LOWESTADJACENT GRADE ARE EXEMPT FROM WELDINGSPECIAL INSPECTION.TUBE STEEL GATE KICKPLATE6" = 1'-0"- 10"
3" MAX.

NOTES:A.ADDITIONAL NOTES PERB.OPEN-MESH GATES WITHMAXIMUM LEAF SPAN ORROLLING SECTION FORROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" &APEX HT. LESS THAN 8'-0"ABOVE LOWEST ADJACENTGRADE ARE EXEMPT FROMWELDING SPECIAL INSPECTION.

TUBULAR STEEL FENCE PICKETTUBULAR STEEL RAIL FRAME12 GA. STEEL GALVANIZEDKICKPLATE. WELD TO FRAME TOP &BOTTOM. MOUNT FLUSH W/BOTTOMOF FRAMETUBULAR STEEL GATE POST BEYONDTUBULAR STEEL BOTTOM RAILFRAME04L5.08 1122
3 3
4 4
5 53/8"
LEVER HARDWARE1 1/2"=1'-0"-
L5.1002
1234567432
7 156
DELIVERY TO SITE.D. SHOP WELD HOUSING TO GATE PRIOR TO EXTRA HEAVY DUTY MORTISE LOCK.C. LOCK AND HOUSING TO BE EXTERIOR GRADEB. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR HARDWARE.A. STEEL HOUSING TO MATCH GATE FINISH AND COLORNOTES:
8 8
GATE POST/GATE FRAMEGATE FRAMESTEEL HOUSING. VERIFY EXACTSIZE OF FABRICATED STEELHOUSING W/ MANUFACTURER OFHARDWARE. MORTISE LOCKSETSCHLAGE LV9070P 03A 630HANDLE / ONLY ON ONE SIDE.PANIC BAR IS ON THE OTHER SIDEOF GATEBOLT KEEPER TO MATCH GATELATCH BOLTPERFORATED SHEET METAL PERLOCK MORTISE CYLINDER 3" MAX.A - SWING GATEB - FENCENOTES:CONCRETE FOOTING PEROPEN-MESH GATES WITH MAXIMUM LEAF SPAN ORROLLING SECTION FOR ROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" & APEXHT. LESS THAN 8'-0" ABOVE LOWEST ADJACENT GRADEARE EXEMPT FROM WELDING SPECIAL INSPECTION.

HEIGHT VARIESSEE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS

HEIGHT VARIESSEE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS
TUBE STEEL GATE/FENCE CONNECTION3/4" = 1'-0"-
1OUTSIDE FACE OF GATE/FENCETUBULAR STEEL RAIL FRAMESTAINLESS STEEL TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS@12" O.C. WHERE OCCURSPANIC HARDWARE18 GA. CUSTOM PERFORATED SHEET METAL.3/16" DIA. 1/2" STAGGERED CENTERS.PROVIDE 1" CLEAR BORDER AROUNDPERIMETER. CUSTOM AS PART OF THEPERFORATED SHEET WHERE OCCURSTUBULAR STEEL FENCE PICKETTUBULAR STEEL POST BEYONDSTEEL GALVANIZED KICKPLATE PERTUBULAR STEEL BOTTOM RAILFINISHED SURFACE 23456781011 22
9 9
33 4 55 66 778 10102 11-10-9
TUBULAR STEEL FENCING FOOTING1"=1'-0"-EXPANSION JOINT PERCONCRETE FOOTING AND REINFORCING PER EQ.EQ.12"6"MIN.

CONCRETE MOW CURB PER
4"
PER STRUCTURALB. FOOTING AT EDGE OF PAVINGC. FOOTING AT FINISH SURFACETUBULAR STEEL INTERMEDIATE & END POSTFINISH SURFACE/FINISH GRADE12 34 1 56
1 1
2 2 23 3 3 3 5556
4 44 08L5.0104L5.04BASE MATERIAL AND COMPACTED SUB-GRADEPER (SEE GEOTECH REPORT)6"01S1.11 NOTES:A.CONCRETE BATCH PLANT INSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED.B.FOR FOOTING ON CUM RETAINING WALL, REFER TO06S1.11 141108 02
1INSIDE

OUTSIDE
TUBULAR STEEL GATE SECTION3" = 1'-0"-
TUBULAR STEEL HINGE POST1234TUBULAR STEEL GATE FRAME5 6TUBULAR STEEL JAMB POSTSTEEL HOUSING7PANIC HARDWARE8LEVER HARDWARE WITH CYLINDER LOCK9PANIC HARDWARE STRIKE, VON DUPRIN MODEL #299 SURFACE MOUNTEDGATE HINGE09L5.08 34 58
9 NOTES:REFER TO GATE DETAIL FOR TUBULAR STEELSIZES AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 02-
CUSTOM 16 GA. PERFORATED METAL PANEL
10 INSIDE

OUTSIDE
2 8
96 107 74
10TUBULAR STEEL INTERMEDIATE RAIL AT PANIC HARDWARE02L5.10 14- TYP.
03 NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
18 CONSTRUCTIONDETAILS
L5.09

ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023RevisionDate"AS BUILT"DATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADLANDSCAPE IMPROVEMENT PLANS FOR:APPROVED:PLANNINGDATEDRAWING NO.DWN BY:CHKD BY:RVWD BY:DATEINITIALDATEINITIALDATEINITIALENGINEER OF WORKOTHER APPROVALCITY APPROVALREVISION DESCRIPTIONMONROE STREET POOL REPLACEMENTDeveloped forCITY OF CARLSBADCARLSBAD, CA 920083401 MONROE ST.REPLACEMENTMONROE STREET POOLDate Published100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT09/01/202350% CONSTRUCTION DOCS11/13/202308/08/20241st PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL01/29/2024 199-4LLPC2024-008PUB2023-0004PROJECT NO.2nd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL05/01/2024 APPROVED FOR IRRIGATIONAND PLANTING ONLY,INCLUDING PRECISE LOCATIONOF PLANTING AREA. 3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024L5.10CONSTRUCTIONDETAILS- 1'-7 1/2"CL1'-6"CL1'-6"CL1'-6"CL1'-7 1/2"
NOTE:A.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TOLANDSCAPE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TOFABRICATION.B.CLEAN AND GRIND ALL WELDS AND PRE-DRILLEDHOLES SMOOTH PRIOR TO POWDERCOAT FINISH.C.ALL STEEL POSTS, RAILS, AND COMPONENTS TORECIEVE SHOP-APPLIED POWDERCOAT FINISH TOMATCH TNEMEC COLOR 46GR, SINKER.D.FIELD POWDERCOAT ALL FIELD WELDS TO MATCHPOST COLOR AND FINISH PER SPECS.E.REFER TO SPECS AND ELEVATIONS FOR MOREINFORMATION.

END POSTLINE POST
142
3 HSS 4" x 4" x 1/4" STEEL POST. POWDERCOATFINISH TO MATCH TNEMEC COLOR 46GR, SINKER.STEEL ANGLE BRACKET, WELDED TO POST. FORMORE INFORMATION, SEE2" X 2" X 3/16" THICK STEEL ANGLE TOP RAIL.2" X 2" X 3/16" THICK STEEL ANGLE BOTTOM RAILFINISH SURFACE5/16" DIAMETER HOLE FOR PERFORATED PANELMOUNTING

SECTION A
A- A-
11L5.1111L5.11SIM11L5.11
TYP
PERFORATED PANEL FENCE POST1" = 1'-0"SAME
162
3 TYP
5 05L5.1112345
5 14
2 3
TYP
5 7'-9"
1/8"
6 661"1"
1"1"
641"1"
1"1"
4 910PER ELEVATIONS8'-0" MAX25
3 3" MAX
1PER ELEVATION12345678911NOTES:A.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTFOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION.B.CLEAN AND GRIND ALL WELDS AND PRE-DRILLED HOLES SMOOTH PRIORTO POWDERCOATING.C.POWDERCOATING AND WELDING TO OCCUR PRIOR TO DELIVERY TOTHE SITE.D.ALL STEEL POSTS, RAILS, AND COMPONENTS TO RECEIVESHOP-APPLIED POWDERCOAT FINISH. COLOR TO MATCH TNEMECCOLOR 46GR, SINKERE.REFER TO SPECS FOR MORE INFORMATION.PERFORATED METAL DOUBLE PEDESTRIAN GATE W/ PANIC HARDWARE - G11/2"=1'-0"- 2" X 2" X 3/16" TUBULAR STEEL SIDE FRAME2" X 2" X 3/16" TUBULAR STEEL TOP RAIL, ALIGN W/ ADJACENT PERF.PANELFINISH SURFACEBASE MATERIAL & COMPACTED SUBGRADE PER GEOTECH REPORTTUBULAR STEEL POSTPANIC HARDWARE ON INSIDE OF GATE PERNOT USEDADJACENT FENCING PERKENWA 700 SERIES SS 1-5/8" 180 DEG. SELF CLOSING HINGE, 3X PERGATE. FINISH, COATING & COLOR TO MATCH GATESTEEL GALVANIZED KICKPLATE (BEYOND) PER1/8" CUSTOM PERFORATED SHEET METAL. 3/8" DIA. ROUND WITH9/16" STAGGERED CENTERS. PROVIDE 2" CLEAR BORDER AROUNDPERIMETER AND 10" CLEAR FROM THE BOTTOM. CUSTOM AS PARTOF THE PERFORATED SHEETKNOXBOX PER SPECS. KNOXBOX TO COMPLY WITH CFC 506.210 11L5.09 10L5.09
03L5.09
04L5.0988
04-
11 36"
03,14L5.096
1BS1.11
12 125'-0"
1234
NOTES:A.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO LANDSCAPEARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION.B.CLEAN AND GRIND ALL WELDS AND PRE-DRILLED HOLESSMOOTH PRIOR TO POWDERCOATING.C.POWDERCOATING AND WELDING TO OCCUR PRIOR TODELIVERY TO THE SITE.D.ALL STEEL POSTS, RAILS, AND COMPONENTS TO RECEIVESHOP-APPLIED POWDERCOAT FINISH. COLOR TO MATCHTNEMEC COLOR 46GR, SINKERE.REFER TO SPECS FOR MORE INFORMATION.F.TUBULAR STEEL COMPONENT SIZING & ADDITIONAL NOTESPERPERFORATED METAL FENCE1/2"=1'-0"- TUBULAR STEEL POST BEYOND. TOP OFPERFORATED PANEL TO ALIGN WITH TOP OFPOST. EDGE OF PERFORATED PANEL TO ALIGNTO OUTSIDE EDGE OF END POST1/4" CUSTOM PERFORATED SHEET METAL. 3/8"DIA. ROUND WITH 9/16" STAGGERED CENTERS.PROVIDE 2" CLEAR BORDER AROUNDPERIMETER. 93" HT, WIDTH PER ELEVATION.COLOR AND FINISH PER MATERIALS PLANS.STEEL ANGLE BRACKET, PER2" X 2" X 3/16" THICK STEEL ANGLE TOP RAIL.2" X 2" X 3/16" THICK STEEL ANGLE BOTTOM RAIL2" X 2" X 3/16" THICK STEEL ANGLE FRAME ATCANTILEVER PANELFINISH SURFACEADJACENT BUILDING 10-
3"
1 3" CLRTYP.PER ELEVATION5'-0" MAX O.C.14 4 6
75 2TYP.1 05L5.113TYP.
5678
8 05S1.11PER ELEVATIONS8'-0" MAX
3' -0" MAX3/1610-
10-
10-
0410
0208

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
19 CONSTRUCTIONDETAILS
L5.10

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023RevisionDate"AS BUILT"DATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADLANDSCAPE IMPROVEMENT PLANS FOR:APPROVED:PLANNINGDATEDRAWING NO.DWN BY:CHKD BY:RVWD BY:DATEINITIALDATEINITIALDATEINITIALENGINEER OF WORKOTHER APPROVALCITY APPROVALREVISION DESCRIPTIONMONROE STREET POOL REPLACEMENTDeveloped forCITY OF CARLSBADCARLSBAD, CA 920083401 MONROE ST.REPLACEMENTMONROE STREET POOLDate Published100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT09/01/202350% CONSTRUCTION DOCS11/13/202308/08/20241st PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL01/29/2024 199-4LLPC2024-008PUB2023-0004PROJECT NO.2nd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL05/01/2024 APPROVED FOR IRRIGATIONAND PLANTING ONLY,INCLUDING PRECISE LOCATIONOF PLANTING AREA. 3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024L5.11CONSTRUCTIONDETAILS-08/23/2023 TUBULAR STEEL POSTL 2" X 2" X 1/4" X 0'-3" STEEL ANGLEBRACKET5/16" X 5/8" SLOTLINE OF ANGLE BRACKET BEYONDANGLE BRACKET AT TUBULAR STEEL POSTFULLSAME7/8"TYP5/8"TYP7/8"TYP5/8"TYPCL 3/4"TYPCL
5/8"
NOTE:A.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TOFABRICATION.B.CLEAN AND GRIND ALL SHOP WELDS AND PRE-DRILLED HOLES SMOOTH PRIOR TOPOWDERCOATING.C.POWDERCOAT AND WELDING TO OCCUR PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE SITE.D.ALL STEEL POSTS, RAILS, BRACKETS, AND COMPONENTS TO RECEIVE SHOP-APPLIED POWDERCOATFINISH. COLOR TO MATCH TNEMEC COLOR 46GR, SINKER.E.REFER TO SPECS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 1 43
1432
2TYP.TYP.
3/16"
CLCL
5/16"TYP.
3/16"
3"
2"
34 11-
3 SIDES3 SIDES2PERFORATED METAL PANEL. FOR MORE INFO, SEE1" X 1/4" DIA. TAMPER-PROOF STAINLESS STEELFASTENER1/8" THICK NEOPRENE FLAT WASHERTUBULAR STEEL POST.STEEL ANGLE BRACKET, WELDED TO POST. FOR MOREINFORMATION, REFER TO

PERFORATED PANEL MOUNTINGFULLSAME
NOTE:A.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TOLANDSCAPE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TOFABRICATION.B.CLEAN AND GRIND ALL WELDS AND PRE-DRILLED HOLESSMOOTH PRIOR TO POWDERCOATING.C.POWDERCOATING AND WELDING TO OCCUR PRIOR TODELIVERY TO THE SITE.D.ALL STEEL POSTS, RAILS, AND COMPONENTS TO RECEIVESHOP-APPLIED POWDERCOAT FINISH. COLOR TO MATCHTNEMEC COLOR 46GR, SINKERE.REFER TO SPECS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 4 53
2112345 02L5.1005---3/16"
2"
3/8"1 3 3/16"1/4"
04 0511
DRINKING FOUNTAIN1/2"=1'-0"-
1234567 81
82 2 3
6 657
99 101112131211132"1'-6" SQ.10
27"CLR
27"CLR
41-1/2" TO ORIFICE
54-1/2"4

SECTION
PLAN134"-1/2" TO ORIFICE
30" X 48"CLR. FLOORSPACE29°29°1'-5"1'-5"46"
51-1/4" TO ORIFICE
10"
NOTE:A.DRINKING FOUNTAIN AVAILABLE THROUGH HAWS MODEL#3612B.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY MODEL NUMBER AND QUANTITYPRIOR TO PLACING AN ORDER. PER MANUFACTURERSINSTRUCTIONS CONTRACTOR TO ASSEMBLE MODULES TOSUIT THE ARCHITECTS LAYOUT OF MODULAR COMPONETS.LPA 30" X 48"CLR. FLOORSPACE14
1410-
14 DRINKING FOUNTAIN WITH BOTTLE FILLERCONCRETE PAVING PER MATERIALS PLANFINISH GRADEREMOTELY LOCATE A 9" RND BLACK PLASTIC VALVE BOX IN ANADJACENT PLANTER @ A LOCATION TO BE DETERMINED IN THEFIELD BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTCONTROL VALVE. SIZE PER MANUFACTURER1/2" REINFORCED NYLOBROID TUBING. CONNECT TO STUB OUTPER CIVIL UTILITIES1 1/2" PVC DRAINLINE. CONNECT TO DRAINLINE PER CIVILUTILITY PLAN SHEET C-401COMPACTED SUBGRADE PER GEOTECH REPORT4X 18" X 1/2"-#13 UNC CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTSCONCRETE FOOTING#3 CLOSED TIES @ 12" O.C.(3) #3 CLOSED TIES WITHIN TOP 5" OF CAISSON(4) #3 VERTICAL BARSDETECTABLE CANE RAIL PER3"MIN.3'-0"BIKE RACK FOOTING1/2"=1'-0"- 18".DIA.2'-0"
5312
2 34
4 110"5SUPPLIER/MODEL: COLUMBIA CASCADE COMPANY/2170-7-E-CCOLOR/FINISH: PER MATERIALS PLANCONCRETE PAVING PER MATERIALS PLAN.CONCRETE FOOTING.3/8" ANCHOR ROD PER MANUFACTURER.BASE MATERIAL AND COMPACTED SUBGRADE PERGEOTECH REPORTNOTES:1.BIKE RACK AVAILABLE THROUGH COLUMBIA CASCADECOMPANY; MODEL 2170-7-E-C2.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY MODEL NUMBER AND QUANTITYPRIOR TO PLACING AN ORDER. PER MANUFACTURERSINSTRUCTIONS CONTRACTOR TO ASSEMBLE MODULES TOSUIT THE ARCHITECTS LAYOUT OF MODULAR COMPONENTS.10DETECTABLE SIDE RAIL1/2" = 1'-0"-ELEVATION1'-0"CONCRETE PER LAYOUT ANDMATERIALS PLAN.PROVIDE GALV. 1.90"O.D. STEEL PIPESCH. 40 ASSEMBLY W/ 1/4" RADIUSCORNERS AND LOW RAIL. WELD ANDGRIND ALL JOINTS. RAIL ASSEMBLYTO RESIST 250# OF LATERAL FORCE.FINISH TO MATCH HANDRAILS 6"MAX.FIN. SURFACE3"Ø x 9" GALV. STL. PIPE SLEEVE W/ 1/8"BASE PLATE, WELDEDPROVIDE NON SHRINK GROUT ALLAROUND PIPE, TYP.CONCRETE FOOTING(18"x 2'-6"x12" THK. MIN.)3"(TYP.) 18"U.O.N.ON PLANS34"MAX.2 #4 BOTTOM. EA. WAY-3" CLRNOTES:1.CONCRETE BATCH PLANTINSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED.13

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
20 CONSTRUCTIONDETAILS
L5.11

SECTION
123456751
2 262
8'-0

ELEVATION
713522
3"
05- 17L5.08
14L5.08
ALIGN, TYP.

NOTE:1.ALL WELDS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS WELDS.2.ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED.3.AFTER FIELD INSTALLATION APPLY COLD GALVANIZED ALL FIELDWELDS PRIOR TO PAINTING.4.PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION.5.CONCRETE BATCH PLANT INSPECTION IS NOT REQUIRED 8 7'-0" AT BUILDING A &6'-0 AT TRASH ENCLOSURE
408-
989
7 1010
08L5.0905S1.1104L5.0204L5.01
16 GAUGE GALVANIZED CORRUGATED METALDECK AVAILABLE THROUGH INDUSTRIALMETAL SUPPLY OR EQUAL.3 X 3 X 0.188 STEEL ANGLE FRAME6 X 6 X 0.25 TUBE STEEL POSTW/ WELDED CAP PER1/4" X 2" DIAGONAL BRACEFINISH SURFACE / GRADENOT USEDCMU FREESTANDING WALL PERTUBE STEEL POST BASEATTACHMENT PER DETAILCONCRETE FOOTING PER STRUCTURALEXPANSION JOINT4 NOTE:1.ALL WELDS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS WELDS.2.ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANIZED.3.AFTER FIELD INSTALLATION APPLY COLD GALVANIZEDALL FIELD WELDS PRIOR TO PAINTING.4.PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION.5.CONCRETE BATCH PLANT INSPECTION IS NOTREQUIRED 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED CORRUGATEDMETAL DECK AVAILABLE THROUGHINDUSTRIAL METAL SUPPLY OR EQUAL.3 X 3 X .25 TUBE STEEL GATE FRAME.2" X .25 DIAGONAL BRACECMU FREESTANDING WALL PERFINISH SURFACE4 X 4 X .25 SQ. TUBE STEEL POST.TUBE STEEL POST BASE ATTACHMENT PERSTRUCTURAL DETAILCONCRETE FOOTING PER STRUCTURALEXPANSION JOINT 1234565
123 44 3'-4"6
7'-0" AT BULIDING A6'-0" AT TRASH ENCLOSURE4'-0"
6 78
7 8
99 1/2" = 1'-0"METAL PANEL SINGLE GATE - CMU ENCLOSURE- 05-17L5.08 04L5.02
04L5.0105S1.11TYP.

TYP. OF 3
3"12"
4 1CMU BLOCK WALL234
5 5
6 674"X4" STEEL ANGLE GATE FRAME
72 16 GA GALV. CORRUGATED METAL GATE04L5.02
13GATE POST1" DIA. PIPE WITH 1/4"x4"x4" PLATE WELDEDTO PIPE AND GATE FRAME1" DIA. PIPE WITH 1/4"x4"x4" PLATE METAL PANEL GATE- HINGES3" = 1'-0"-
04- NOTE:A. OPEN-MESH GATES WITH MAXIMUMLEAF SPAN OR ROLLING SECTION FORROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" & APEX HT.LESS THAN 8'-0" ABOVE LOWESTADJACENT GRADE ARE EXEMPT FROMWELDING SPECIAL INSPECTION.8" LONG ROD WELDED TO TOPPIPE SLEEVE AND SET IN BOTTOMSLEEVE10- CMU BLOCK WALLHSS POST PER4"X4"X1/4" STL. ANGLE GATEFRAME1/4"X2" DIAGONAL BRACE16 GA. GALVANIZED CORRUGATED METAL GATENOTES:1. GALVANIZE ALL METAL MEMBERS INCLUDING METALDECKING & PREP FOR PAINTING2.SEE METAL FENCE AND GATE NOTES ON SHEET LO.O1.13.OPEN-MESH GATES WITH MAXIMUM LEAF SPAN ORROLLING SECTION FOR ROLLING GATES OF 10'-0" & APEXHT. LESS THAN 8'-0" ABOVE LOWEST ADJACENT GRADEARE EXEMPT FROM WELDING SPECIAL INSPECTION.HINGE, 2 PER JAMB6 45 54 63
2 1 04L5.02
ALIGN3
METAL PANEL GATE- JAMB 3" = 1'-0"-
2 1
7ATTACH CORRUGATED METAL GATE TO FRAMEWITH 58" Ø PUDDLE WELDS AT 24" O.C. ALLAROUND.

CLEQEQ
718"18"FRAMETO HINGE
12" GAP
04-05-10-
21 NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024

GAYLEWAYMONROE STREET
CO
CO 3"DW3"DW
CO
CO4"SS3"DW3"DW
3"DW
3"DW
3"DW
BFVM
CER
A121"S161.8325705HZ3
A11"DT6.50.7025892HZ1740' TUBING
FF
A31"DT9.10.70251,240HZ11,030' TUBING
F
FFFF
FF
FFF
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
A71"DT12.50.70251,702HZ11,410' TUBINGA61"DT11.00.70251,509HZ21,250'TUBING A51"DT13.90.70251,899HZ11,570' TUBINGA41"DT14.10.70251,925HZ11,600' TUBING A101"DT4.60.7025626HZ2520' TUBINGA91"DT13.40.70251,841HZ21,520' TUBING A111"DT2.30.7025311HZ1260' TUBING
F
A21"TB11.5025N/AHZ4
A81"TB121.5025N/AHZ4
3/4"3/4"1"
1"1"
11/4"11/4"
3/4"3/4"1"
3/4"3/4"
1"
1"
3/4"3/4"
11/4"
1"1" 1"1"
1"11/4"11/4"
1"3/4"
1"1"
1"
1"
1"1"1"1"
1"
1"
1"1"1"1"
1"1"1"
1"1"
1"1"1"
1"1"
1"11/4"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
A131"S151.8325705HZ3A141"S151.8325705HZ3A151"S151.8325705HZ3A161"S161.8325705HZ3 11/4"11/4"11/4" 11/4"3/4"3/4"3/4"3/4"1"
3/4"3/4"1"11/4"11/4"1"
3/4"1"
1"11/4"
11/4"3/4"11/4"11/4"11/4"
3/4"1"
1"11/4"
11/4"
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

APPROVED:DEPUTY CITY ENGINEERDATEDRAWING NO.DWN BY:CHKD BY:RVWD BY:DATEINITIALDATEINITIALDATEINITIALENGINEER OF WORKOTHER APPROVALCITY APPROVALREVISION DESCRIPTIONEXPIRESJOHN MAASHOFF9/30/25 MONROE STREET POOL REPLACEMENTDeveloped forCITY OF CARLSBAD PUBLIC WORKSCARLSBAD, CA 920083401 MONROE ST.REPLACEMENTMONROE STREET POOLDate Published100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT09/01/202350% CONSTRUCTION DOCS11/13/202304/26/20241st PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL01/29/2024 199-4PROJECT 4724
LICENSE # C61909PROJECT NO.
2nd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL04/26/2024
N

MONROE STREETLIMIT OF WORKPROPERTY LINE
01IRRIGATION PLAN1" = 20'-0"

LIMIT OF WORK
NOTE:FINAL AS-BUILT PLANS WILL BE REQUIRED TO BEREVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE CITY AND FINAL PLANSWILL BE REQUIRED TO BE APPROVED AND SIGNED BY THECITY PRIOR TO RELEASE OF SECURITIES.

NOTE A:POINT OF CONNECTION (POC) #1 SHALL BE A 1" DOMESTIC WATER METER WITH A 1"SERVICE LINE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE ACTUAL LOCATION, WATER TYPE,METER SIZE AND WATER PRESSURE IN THE FIELD PRIOR TO STARTING WORK.MEASUREMENT OF THE STATIC (NO WATER MOVING) WATER PRESSURE IS ACCEPTABLEFOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS WHERE NO PUMP HAS BEEN INDICATED ON THESEPLANS. WHEN USING RECYCLED WATER, OR ON POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS REQUIRINGA PUMP, ONLY THE MEASUREMENT OF DYNAMIC (WATER MOVING THROUGH THEMETER) WATER PRESSURE, SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE. THE DYNAMIC WATER PRESSURESHALL BE MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM SYSTEM DEMAND AS INDICATED BELOW. IF ANYOF THE POC INFORMATION SHOWN ON THESE DRAWING IS FOUND TO BE DIFFERENTTHAN THE ACTUAL POC INFORMATION GATHERED IN THE FIELD, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFYTHE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND IRRIGATION CONSULTANT. SHOULD THECONTRACTOR FAIL TO VERIFY THE POC INFORMATION AS SHOWN HEREIN, ANYCHANGES REQUIRED BY LOW PRESSURE OR VOLUME SHALL BE THE SOLERESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.WATER PRESSURE AT POC:54PSI(STATIC)DESIGN WATER PRESSURE:50PSIMAXIMUM SYSTEM DEMAND:16GPMRESIDUAL WATER PRESSURE:4PSINOTE B:CONTROLLER "A" SHALL BE OF THE BRAND, MODEL AND STATION SIZE AS INDICATED ONTHE IRRIGATION MATERIALS LEGEND. THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THEAPPROXIMATE LOCATION SHOWN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THEREQUIRED ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY AT THIS LOCATION WITH THE OWNER'SAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE. FINAL LOCATION OF CONTROLLER AND ELECTRICALPOINT OF CONNECTION SHALL BE CONFIRMED WITH OWNER'S AUTHORIZEDREPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO STARTING WORK.NOTE C:THESE PLANS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC, THE MAINLINE AND RELATED IRRIGATIONEQUIPMENT IS SHOWN WITHIN THE PAVING FOR CLARITY ONLY. THE ACTUAL LOCATIONOF MAINLINE AND RELATED IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE WITHIN PLANTER AND AMINIMUM OF 18" OFF ADJACENT HARDSCAPE AND OTHER OBSTACLES, TYPICAL.NOTE D:CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST ALL HEADS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE ANYVERTICAL OBSTRUCTIONS THAT MAY OCCUR IN THE LANDSCAPE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO LIGHT POLES, FIRE HYDRANTS, TREES, ETC. WHEN A SLIGHT RELOCATIONOF THE HEAD IS NOT SUFFICIENT TO CLEAR THE OBSTACLE, OR IF IT NEGATIVELYAFFECTS THE COVERAGE, AN ADDITIONAL HEAD SHALL BE INSTALLED TO PLACE ONEHEAD ON EITHER SIDE OF THE OBSTACLE. THE NOZZLES OF THESE TWO HEADS SHALLHAVE ARC PATTERNS THAT ADD UP TO THE ORIGINAL ARC PATTERN OF THE HEADINDICATED ON THE PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL HEAD LAYOUT WITHOWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO STARTING WORK.NOTE E:THESE PLANS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC, TREE BUBBLERS AND LATERAL LINES ARE SHOWNWITHIN THE PAVING FOR CLARITY ONLY, THE ACTUAL LOCATIONS SHALL BE WITHIN THEPLANTER. THE TREE BUBBLERS SHALL BE ALIGNED WITH TREES AS SHOWN ON THEPLANTING PLANS, AND AS DIRECTED BY OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE. THECONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM ALL LAYOUT IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S AUTHORIZEDREPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO STARTING WORK.NOTE F:CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING WITHIN THEDRIPLINE OF EXISTING TREES. NO MECHANICAL TRENCHING WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OFTHE EXISTING TREE WILL BE ALLOWED. AIR SPADE SHALL BE UTILIZED FOR ALLTRENCHING WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OF TREES. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TOARBORIST REPORT FOR ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE EXISTINGTREES. VERIFY ALL LAYOUT IN FIELD WITH OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE.NOTE G:PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TO THE OWNERAND LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT A SCALED SHOP DRAWING INDICATING THE PROPOSEDLOCATIONS FOR THE IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT LISTED BELOW. THE SHOP DRAWINGSHALL BE PREPARED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER AND LANDSCAPEARCHITECT. SHOP DRAWINGS MUST INCLUDE THE PROPOSED LOCATIONS FOR THEFOLLOWING ITEMS:1.POINT OF CONNECTION (INCLUDING WATER POC, BACK FLOW DEVICES, MASTER CONTROL VALVES, FLOW SENSORS, ETC.)2.ISOLATION VALVES 3.AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES (INDICATE STATION NUMBER) 4.QUICK COUPLING VALVES5.IRRIGATION CONTROLLER(S) 6.RELATED EQUIPMENT (AS MAY BE DIRECTED).EACH PIECE OF AFOREMENTIONED EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE IT'S PROPOSED INSTALLEDLOCATION SHOWN ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS. THE SYMBOL FOR EACH PRODUCT SHALLBE A SCALED REPRESENTATION OF THE FOOTPRINT OF THE EQUIPMENT OR THE VALVEBOX IN WHICH THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL VALVEBOXES AND RELATED EQUIPMENT PER THE OWNER APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. ONCETHE SHOP DRAWING LOCATIONS ARE APPROVED, THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT OROWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE WILL ALLOW NO ADJUSTMENTS TO THEAPPROVED VALVE BOX PLACEMENT WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN ACCEPTANCE. ANYIRRIGATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLED WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL WITH SHOP DRAWINGSWILL BE SUBJECT TO RELOCATION BASED ON DIRECTION BY THE LANDSCAPEARCHITECT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

IRRIGATION POINT OF CONNECTION #1;REFER TO NOTE "A"

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN IRRIGATION CONTROLLER "A";REFER TO NOTE "B"
L6.01IRRIGATION PLAN1" - 20'-0"
POLE MOUNTED TIPPING RAINBUCK, CONTRACTOR TOCOORDINATE FOR FINALLOCATION IN THE FIELD.

EXISTING TREEPROTECT IN PLACE;REFER TO NOTE "F"
256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 22
546-8L
1"
1"
1"
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024
MODEL NO. / DESCRIPTIONIRRIGATION MATERIAL LEGENDFQTHSYMBOLMANUFACTURER DETAILRADIUSPSIFLOW RATE (GPM)

AS APPROVEDAS APPROVEDN/A

GPH IRRIGATIONPAIGE ELECTRIC
LASCO
P.O.C.WILKINS
NDS (K.B.I.)
V.I.T.MB
RE
LASCO

AS APPROVED

SUPERIOR

AS APPROVED
PR. RATE

WELD-ON

GPH IRRIGATION/F AS APPROVED

NO SYMBOL

NO SYMBOLV

RAIN BIRD
I.T.S / CALSENSE

NO SYMBOLNO SYMBOL

NO SYMBOLNO SYMBOLNO SYMBOLNO SYMBOLNO SYMBOLRAIN BIRDNO SYMBOL C,D,E
C,D,E

C,D,EC,D,ED,FN/AGGHJKLM

ON/APPQN/AN/AN/AP,Q,RR
2515 FT25RAIN BIRDRAIN BIRD
NDS (K.B.I.)
HUNTER
.50 (1.00 TOTAL)1.5 FT

NETAFIM

1.50 IN./HR.A,BA

RAIN BIRDRAIN BIRD
ARAIN BIRDSPRINKLER HEADS WITH 1/2" NPT INLETS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH A SA-125050 POLY SWING JOINT AS PART OF THE ASSEMBLYNO SYMBOLSUB-SURFACE DRIP TUBING AS DESCRIBED BELOW:0.53 GPH / EMITTERN/A300.70 IN./HR.

RD-06-S-P30-F 6" POP-UP BUBBLER HEAD WITH A HUNTER MSBN-50Q STREAM BUBBLERNOZZLE EACH SYMBOL REPRESENTS TWO (2) BUBBLER TO PROVIDE A TOTAL OF TWO (2)BUBBLERS PER TREE. PLACE THE BUBBLER HEADS SIX (6) INCHES FROM THE ROOT BALLOF THE TREE AND ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF TREE. ADJUST BUBBLER STREAMS TO WET THEROOT BALL AND ADJACENT AMENDED SOIL WITHOUT HITTING THE TRUNK OF THE TREE.TLHCVXR5-12 SUBSURFACE DRIP TUBING (BROWN EXTERIOR COLOR WITH A COPPER OXIDE STRIPE) WITH 0.53 GPH, PRESSURE COMPENSATINGEMITTERS INTERNALLY INSTALLED IN THE DRIP TUBING AT 12" O.C. SPACING. DRIP TUBING SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH A CONTINUOUS EXTERIOR CUPRONSTRIPE, COPPER OXIDE INFUSED EMITTERS AND A PHYSICAL BARRIER TO PREVENT ROOT INTRUSION INTO THE DRIP EMITTER. DRIP EMITTERS SHALL BECONTINUOUS FLUSHING TYPE AND EQUIPPED WITH A CHECK VALVE AND ANTI-SIPHON FEATURE. DRIP TUBING SHALL BE INSTALLED 4" BELOW THEFINISHED SOIL GRADE (NOT COUNTING MULCH) AND IN PARALLEL ROWS A MAXIMUM OF 16" ON CENTER. THE PERIMETER ROW OF DRIP TUBING SHALL BEINSTALLED A MAXIMUM OF 4" FROM THE EDGE OF ANY HARDSCAPE OR TURF EDGE. ALL SUBSEQUENT INTERIOR ROWS SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO PROVIDEAN EVEN SPACING ACROSS THE PLANTER WITHOUT EXCEEDING 16" MAXIMUM SPACING. INSTALL 9" PVC COATED GALVANIZED TUBING STAKES AMAXIMUM OF FIVE (5) FEET ON CENTER ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TUBING. TUBING STAKES SHALL BE MODEL #GDTS140900 AS MANUFACTURED BYGPH IRRIGATION PRODUCTS (866) 582-9684. THE LINES SHOWN ON THE PLANS REPRESENT THE APPROXIMATE DIRECTION AND SPACING OF THE DRIPTUBING ROWS, SEE SPACING REQUIREMENTS ABOVE AND IN DETAILS.CONNECTION BETWEEN HCVXR DRIP TUBING AND PVC SUPPLY AND DISCHARGE HEADERS SHALL BE MADE USING TL DRIP LINE BARBED FITTINGS, SCH.40 PVC THREADED FITTINGS, SCH. 80 NIPPLES AND FLEXIBLE NIPPLES. WHEN THE CONNECTION IS AT THE END RUN OF THE TUBING USE A 1/2" SCH. 40PVC THREADED 90° ELBOW, A 1/2" X LENGTH AS REQUIRED SCH. 80 PVC THREADED NIPPLE, A 1/2" X 6" MIPT X FIPT FLEXIBLE NIPPLE, AND A TL050MA17mm BARB X 1/2" MIPT ADAPTER FITTING. WHEN THE CONNECTION IS IN THE MIDDLE OF THE TUBING RUN USE A 1/2" SCH. 40 PVC THREADED TEEFITTING, A 1/2" X LENGTH AS REQUIRED SCH. 80 PVC THREADED NIPPLE, A 1/2" X 6" MIPT X FIPT FLEXIBLE NIPPLE, AND TWO (2) TL050MA 17mm BARB X 1/2"MIPT ADAPTERS. ALL END RUNS OF TUBING SHALL BE CONNECTED WITH A PVC DISCHARGE HEADER. FLEXIBLE NIPPLES SHALL BE MODEL #GFN050600AS MANUFACTURED BY GPH IRRIGATION PRODUCTS (866) 582-9684.TL SERIES 17mm BARBED FITTINGS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DRIP TUBING (TUBING-TO-TUBING ONLY). NO HEATING OF TUBING SHALL BE ALLOWED.PVC SUPPLY AND DISCHARGE HEADERS SHALL BE PVC LATERAL LINE PIPE (AS SHOWN BELOW), 1" MINIMUM SIZE WITH SCH. 40 PVC FITTINGS.GDFN DRIP FLUSH / INDICATOR NOZZLE, ORANGE IN COLOR, INSTALLED ONTO A HUNTER ECO-ID-12 12" POP-UP INDICATOR HEAD. THE FLUSHNOZZLE SHALL BE CLOSED FOR NORMAL OPERATION OF THE DRIP SYSTEM.1" POTABLE (DOMESTIC) DEDICATED IRRIGATION WATER METER WITH 1" SERVICE LINE. VERIFY SIZE, LOCATION AND PRESSURE IN FIELD.975XLS, 2" R/P BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE WITH WYE STRAINER, INSTALL WITH BRASS NIPPLES, UNIONS AND FITTINGS, SIZED PER DEVICESTRONG BOX SBBC-45SS "SMOOTH TOUCH" STAINLESS STEEL BACK FLOW DEVICE ENCLOSURE3200-100 1" NORMALLY CLOSED, BRASS MASTER CONTROL VALVE. WIRE MCV TO THE CONTROLLER USING A SEPARATE PILOT AND GROUND WIRE,ROUTE INSIDE A 1" SCH. 40 PVC (GRAY) ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. INSTALL INSIDE A STANDARD RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX.V20101N-SC 2" SLO-CLOSE SCH. 80 PVC, TRUE-UNION BALL VALVE WITH SOLVENT WELD SOCKET CONNECTIONS, LINE SIZE PER MAINLINE.INSTALL INSIDE A 10" ROUND VALVE BOX.44LRC 1" QUICK COUPLER VALVE WITH LOCKING VINYL COVER AND A LASCO G13S-218 SWING JOINT. INSTALL INSIDE A 10" ROUND VALVE BOX.100-PESB-PRS-D PRESSURE REGULATING, PLASTIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVE (RCV), SIZE AS SHOWN (1" SIZE), SET PRS-D PRESSURE REGULATOR TOPROVIDE THE OPERATING PRESSURE OF THE SPRINKLER / BUBBLER HEAD AT THE HIGHEST OR FARTHEST HEAD ON THE CONTROL VALVE ZONE(MEASURE PSI AT HEAD). INSTALL THE RCV INSIDE A STANDARD RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX.100-PESB PLASTIC DRIP REMOTE CONTROL VALVE, SIZE AS SHOWN (1" SIZE). INSTALL A RAIN BIRD LCRBY-100D DISC FILTER AND A SENNINGER 1"PMR-40-MF PRESSURE REGULATOR DOWNSTREAM SIDE OF EACH DRIP REMOTE CONTROL VALVE (DRCV). INSTALL THE DRCV ASSEMBLY INSIDE A JUMBORECTANGULAR VALVE BOX.RB-1 POLE MOUNTED TIPPING RAIN BUCKET AS PART OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY, COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION IN THE FIELD WITH OWNERSREPRESENTATIVE.120 VOLT ELECTRICAL POWER FOR CONTROLLER, PROVIDED BY ELECTRICIAN, VERIFY ACTUAL LOCATION IN FIELDPVC PIPE 3/4" - 1 1/4" SCH. 40, SOLVENT WELD WITH SCH. 40 PVC FITTINGS, AS LATERAL LINES INSTALLED 12" BELOW FINISHED GRADEPVC PIPE 2" CL. 315, SOLVENT WELD WITH SCH. 80 PVC FITTINGS, AS MAINLINES INSTALLED 18" BELOW FINISHED GRADEPVC PIPE SCH. 40 AS SLEEVING, TWICE THE DIAMETER OF PIPE OR WIRE BUNDLE CARRIED (2" MINIMUM SIZE) INSTALL ALL PIPE AND WIRE UNDERPAVING, HARDSCAPE, ETC. (OR AS DIRECTED BY OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) INSIDE SLEEVES. SLEEVES UNDER PEDESTRIAN PAVINGSHALL BE INSTALLED 24" BELOW FINISHED GRADE. SLEEVES UNDER VEHICULAR PAVING SHALL BE INSTALLED 36" BELOW FINISHED GRADE.ALL FITTINGS USED WITH SOLVENT WELD MAINLINE PIPE SHALL BE SCH. 80 PVC FITTINGS, GRAY IN COLOR, AND SIZED TO MATCH THE MAINLINEPIPE. ALL FITTINGS USED WITH SOLVENT WELD LATERAL LINE PIPE SHALL BE SCH. 40 PVC, WHITE IN COLOR, AND SIZED TO MATCH THE LATERALLINE PIPE. ALL THREADED PVC NIPPLES SHALL BE SCH. 80 PVC PIPE, DARK GRAY IN COLOR, WITH MOLDED THREADS.ALL SOLVENT WELD CONNECTIONS FOR BOTH MAINLINE AND LATERAL LINE SHALL BE MADE USING THE TWO-STEP PROCESS OF PRIMER AND SOLVENTCEMENT. PRIMER SHALL BE P-68 LOW VOC "PURPLE PRIMER". SOLVENT CEMENT SHALL BE 705 LOW VOC, GRAY COLORED "MEDIUM BODIED" CEMENT.USE DAUBERS SIZED AT LEAST ONE-HALF THE SIZE OF THE LARGEST PIPE BEING JOINED. ALL SOLVENT CEMENTED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE PER THEPIPE AND FITTING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.1" SCH. 40 PVC, GRAY ELECTRICAL CONDUIT FOR FLOW SENSOR, PROVIDE PULL BOX AT A MAXIMUM OF 200 FEET ON CENTER FOR A 3 FOOT WIRE LOOPOR ANY SPLICES. INSTALL INSIDE A STANDARD RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX.P7079D POLYETHYLENE INSULATED, SOLID COPPER CONDUCTOR IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE #14UF AWG DIRECT BURIAL (U.L. APPROVED). PILOT WIRESSHALL BE RED IN COLOR, COMMON GROUND WIRE SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR, SPARE WIRES SHALL BE YELLOW IN COLOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ROUTETWO (2) SPARE CONTROL WIRES (YELLOW) FROM THE CONTROLLER ALONG THE MAINLINE IN ALL DIRECTIONS AWAY FROM THE CONTROLLER. LOOP SPAREWIRES UP AND INTO EACH VALVE BOX ALONG THE MAINLINE, PROVIDING A 3 FOOT MINIMUM LOOP. WHERE MULTIPLE CONTROLLERS ARE USED ON THEPROJECT, EACH CONTROLLER SHALL HAVE A DIFFERENT COLOR FOR PILOT WIRES.GDBRY6 DIRECT BURIAL, 100% SILICONE GEL, WATER-PROOF WIRE CONNECTORS FOR USE ON ALL WIRE SPLICES AND CONNECTIONSKSC-XXX-S SWING CHECK VALVE, LATERAL LINE SIZE, INSTALL ONE (1) ON THE DOWNSTREAM SIDE OF EACH RCV WHEN THE RCV IS LOWER THAN THESPRINKLERS, BUBBLERS OR DRIP EMITTERS. INSTALL WITHIN SPRINKLER / BUBBLER / DRIP ZONES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT LOW HEAD DRAINAGE.KC-XXX-S SPRING CHECK VALVE, LATERAL LINE SIZE, INSTALL ONE (1) ON THE DOWNSTREAM SIDE OF EACH RCV WHEN THE RCV IS HIGHER THAN THESPRINKLERS, BUBBLERS OR DRIP EMITTERS. INSTALL WITHIN SPRINKLER / BUBBLER / DRIP ZONES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT LOW HEAD DRAINAGE.VALVE BOXES, SIZE PER EQUIPMENT LEGEND, WITH T-COVER LIDS AND CAPTIVE BOLT AND LOC-KIT. FOR ROUND FLUSH VALES AND AIR RELIEF VALVESUSE MODEL 708, 10" ROUND SHALL BE MODEL 910, 12" STANDARD RECTANGULAR. SHALL BE MODEL 1419, 12" JUMBO RECT. SHALL BE MODEL 1220, SUPERJUMBO SHALL BE MODEL 1324, AND SUPER JUMBO XL SHALL BE MODEL 1730. VALVE BOXES SHALL HAVE GREEN HDPE BODY AND GREEN LIDS IN TURF,GREEN LIDS IN SHRUB BEDS, AND TAN LIDS IN ROCK MULCH. FOR USE IN NON-VEHICULAR TRAFFIC SITUATIONS ONLY. DO NOT INSTALL IN CONCRETE ORASPHALT.

N/AN/AS
F II.T.S / FLOWMECQS100, 1" ULTRASONIC FLOW SENSOR AS PART OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY, WIRE TO CONTROLLER USING TWO (2) #14UF AWG WIRES INSIDE A 11/4"CONDUIT, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. USE SPEARS DS-100 CONNECTORS WITH DS-300 SEALANT.

I.T.S / CALSENSEC NIMPERIAL TECHNICAL SERVICES CALSENSE CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY, MOD.# ICA6-CS3-24/CSTP110/CS3EN/RB-1/CS3WK/FM-1U24 STATION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY CONTACT DARYL GREEN @ 949.584.7311 AT IMPERIAL TECHNICAL SERVICES. COORDINATE CAT 5 OR 6 CABLEWITH A RJ-45 JACK IN CONDUIT BETWEEN THE CONTROLLER AND THE NEAREST ROUTER. RUN NOT TO EXCEED 328' INCLUDING BENDS AND TWISTS.

RD-12-S-P30-F 12" POP-UP SHRUB HEAD WITH 15 SERIES HE-VAN ADJUSTABLE ARC NOZZLE.93, 1.23, 1.85, 3.701.83 IN./HR.

OPERATING PRESSURE (PSI)ZONE AREA (SFT)VALVE FLOW RATE IN G.P.M.VALVE SIZE IN INCHESCONTROLLER LETTER / STATION NUMBER HYDROZONE NUMBER SEE CHARTIRRIGATION METHOD SEE CHARTZONE PRECIPITATION RATE (IN./HR.)A201"DT350.70251,500HZ1 LENGTH OF DRIP TUBINGFOR DRIP TUBING ZONESVALVE CALLOUT LEGEND NUMBERHZ 1DESCRIPTION OF THE HYDROZONELOW WATER USE PLANTINGSHZ 2MODERATE WATER USE PLANTINGSHZ 3MODERATE WATER USE TREES

HYDROZONE DESCRIPTION CHARTSDESCRIPTION OF THE IRRIGATIONSPRAY HEADSDTDRIP TUBINGTBTREE BUBBLERSIRRIGATION METHOD DESCRIPTION CHART 1,750' TUBING
WUCOLSVLMMPLANT FACTOR0.100.500.50 SPRAYDRIPDRIP0.550.800.75LETTERSTYPEIR. EFFICIENCYHZ 4LOW WATER USE BIO-RETENTIONL 0.30 ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN

1.ALL LOCAL MUNICIPAL AND STATE LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS GOVERNING OR RELATING TO ANY PORTION OFTHIS WORK ARE HEREBY INCORPORATED INTO AND MADE A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND THEIRPROVISIONS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY THE CONTRACTOR.2.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND SERVICES BEFORECOMMENCING WORK. THE LOCATIONS OF UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND SERVICES SHOWN IN THESE PLANS AREAPPROXIMATE ONLY. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THESE PLANS AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS SHALL BEREPORTED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.3.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN THE PERTINENT ENGINEERING OR ARCHITECTURAL PLANS BEFORE BEGINNINGWORK.4.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY PERMITS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK INDICATED HEREINBEFORE BEGINNING WORK.5.THIS DESIGN IS DIAGRAMMATIC. ALL EQUIPMENT SHOWN IN PAVED AREAS IS FOR DESIGN CLARITY ONLY AND IS TOBE INSTALLED WITHIN PLANTING AREAS.6.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT WILLFULLY INSTALL ANY EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS WHEN IT IS OBVIOUSIN THE FIELD THAT UNKNOWN CONDITIONS EXIST THAT WERE NOT EVIDENT AT THE TIME THESE PLANS WEREPREPARED. ANY SUCH CONDITIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVEPRIOR TO ANY WORK OR THE IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY FIELDCHANGES DEEMED NECESSARY BY THE OWNER.7.INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN IN THE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLETO COMPLY WITH LOCAL CITY, COUNTY AND STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR BOTH EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION.8.ACTUAL LOCATION FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE BACKFLOW PREVENTER AND THE AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER ISTO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD BY THE OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE.9.CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL PILOT WIRE FROM CONTROLLER ALONG ENTIRETY OF MAIN LINE TOTHE LAST RCV ON EACH AND EVERY LEG OF MAIN LINE. LABEL SPARE WIRES AT BOTH ENDS.10.ALL PIPE UNDER PAVED AREAS TO BE INSTALLED IN SLEEVING TWICE THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE CARRIED. SEELEGEND FOR TYPE. ALL WIRE UNDER PAVED AREAS TO BE INSTALLED IN A SCH. 40 SLEEVE THE SIZE REQUIRED TOEASILY PULL WIRE THROUGH. ALL SLEEVES TO BE INSTALLED WITH A MINIMUM DEPTH AS SHOWN ON THE SLEEVINGDETAILS. SLEEVES TO EXTEND AT LEAST 12" PAST THE EDGE OF THE PAVING.11.ALL QUICK COUPLER AND REMOTE CONTROL VALVES TO BE INSTALLED IN SHRUB OR GROUND COVER AREASWHERE POSSIBLE. ALL QUICK COUPLER AND REMOTE CONTROL VALVES TO BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN ON THEINSTALLATION DETAILS. INSTALL ALL QUICK COUPLER AND REMOTE CONTROL VALVES WITHIN 18" OF HARDSCAPE.12.ALL HEADS ARE TO BE INSTALLED WITH THE NOZZLE, SCREEN AND ARCS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. ALL HEADS ARETO BE ADJUSTED TO PREVENT OVERSPRAY ONTO BUILDINGS, WALLS, FENCES AND HARDSCAPE. THIS INCLUDES,BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFUSER PIN OR ADJUSTMENT SCREW, REPLACEMENT OF PRESSURECOMPENSATING SCREENS, REPLACEMENT OF NOZZLES WITH MORE APPROPRIATE RADIUS UNITS AND THEREPLACEMENT OF NOZZLES WITH ADJUSTABLE ARC UNITS.13.CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ADDITIONAL CHECK VALVES TO HEADS AND LATERALS AS REQUIRED TO PREVENTLOW HEAD DRAINAGE.14.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE PROPER GROUNDING TECHNIQUES FOR GROUNDING THE CONTROLLER ANDRELATED EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS. SWEENEY AND ASSOCIATES RECOMMENDSMEASURING FOR PROPER GROUND AT LEAST ONCE ANNUALLY, AND NECESSARY ADJUSTMENTS MADE TO COMPLYWITH MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS.15.THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO CONTACT DIGALERT OR 811 A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) DAYS PRIOR TO THE STARTOF ANY EXCAVATIONS ON THE PROJECT AND SPECIFICALLY PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF ANY GROUNDINGRODS. DIAL 811 OR LOG ONTO WWW.DIGALERT.ORG TO START A PROJECT TICKET. DIGALERT AND 811 IS A FREESERVICE PROVIDED TO THE PROJECT. FAILURE TO CONTACT AND HAVE THE EXISTING UTILITIES IDENTIFIED,LOCATED AND MARKED SHALL MAKE THE CONTRACTOR SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL DAMAGES.

IRRIGATION NOTES
L6.02IRRIGATION LEGENDAND NOTES
N.T.S.
256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 23
546-8L
SUBSURFACE IRRIGATION SHALL BE USED TO IRRIGATE ANY VEGETATION WITHIN 24" OF AN IMPERMEABLE SURFACE, UNLESS THE ADJACENT IMPERMEABLE SURFACE(S) ARE DESIGNED TO DRAIN ENTIRELY INTO A LANDSCAPE AREA.

IRRIGATION MAINLINE SHALL BE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF THE STREET RIGHT-OF-WAY.

16. 17.
18"
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN

BACKFLOW DEVICEG
TREE BUBBLER LAYOUTBSECTION VIEW - N.T.S.
12" POP-UP HEAD SWING JOINT CONFIGURATIONTWELVE (12) INCH POP-UP SPRINKLER HEAD SIX (6) INCH POP-UP SPRINKLER HEAD12"
LEGEND AND PIPE INSTALLATION DETAILFINISHED SOIL GRADE AT DEPTH SHOWN ONPVC LATERAL LINE PIPE, TYPE AND SIZE ASSHOWN ON DRAWINGS, INSTALL BELOW1/2" SIZE WITH FIPT THREADSSCH 40 PVC SxSxT TEE FITTING, LATERAL X LATERAL X INSTALL SPRAY HEADS 4" FROM PAVING EDGE IN TURF AREAS.AREA WITHOUT OVERSPRAY ONTO PAVING, FENCES, WALLS OR BUILDINGS.INSTALL SPRAY HEADS PLUMB. ADJUST NOZZLE STREAM TO COVER THE LANDSCAPEINSTALL SPRAY HEADS 6" FROM PAVING EDGE IN SHRUB AND GROUND COVER AREAS.INSTALL SPRAY HEADS 12" FROM THE FACE OF BUILDING WALLS OR WINDOWS.NOTE:

INLET HAS 1/2" NPT THREADS.FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREASINSTALL POP-UP SPRAY HEAD FLUSH WITH GRADE IN SHRUB AND GROUND COVER AREASINSTALL POP-UP SPRAY HEAD 1/2" ABOVE FINISHEDUNDISTURBED SOIL MODEL, FEATURES, AND NOZZLES REQUIRED. SPRINKLERPOP-UP SPRAY HEAD, 6" - 12" HEIGHT, SEE LEGEND FOR BRAND,1/2" PRE-ASSEMBLED POLY, TRIPLE SWING JOINT, 1/2"MIPT INLET AND OUTLET WITH A 12" LAY LENGTH,SAME MANUFACTURER AS SPRINKLER HEAD.WITH PVC STREET ELL. 6" POP-UP HEADCONFIGURATION SHOWN.

FLUSH VALVE/INDICATOR HEADF
NOTE:INSTALL INDICATOR HEAD 10" FROM THE EDGE OF PAVING OR THE PLANTER EDGE.INSTALL ORANGE COLORED INDICATOR NOZZLE ON POP-UP HEAD AND ADJUST TO FULLY CLOSED.

INSTALL POP-UP INDICATOR HEAD 1/2" ABOVE FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN INSTALL POP-UP INDICATOR HEAD 10"OFF OF PAVEMENT OR THE EDGE OF SCH 40 PVC SxSxT TEE FITTING, LATERAL X LATERAL X 1/2" SIZE SIZE AS SHOWN ON LEGEND, OR DRIP SYSTEM DISCHARGE HEADER, 1 1/4" MINIMUM SIZE PER THE DRIPINSTALLATION DETAILSPVC LATERAL LINE PIPE, TYPE AND 4"PLANTED AREA SERVED BY DRIP TUBING6" POP-UP INDICATOR HEAD, WITH A GPH IRRIGATION DRIP FLUSH NOZZLE,MODEL #GDFN, ORANGE COLORED NOZZLE TO REMAIN IN THE CLOSED1/2"SHRUB AND GROUND COVER AREASUNDISTURBED SOIL

WITH FIPT THREADS
12" DISCHARGE HEADER SHALL BE INSTALLED 12" BELOW FINISHEDSOIL GRADE, TYPICAL

SUBSURFACE DRIP TUBING, DEPTHAS SHOWN ON LEGEND AND DETAIL 12" POP-UP HEAD, SEE LEGEND
POSITION DURING SYSTEM OPERATIONAND OPENED FOR SYSTEM FLUSHING.DIRECT FLUSH STREAM INTO PLANTER.

DRIP CONNECTION ASSEMBLY, SEEDRIP TUBING CONNECTION DETAIL SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

PRE-ASSEMBLED POLY, TRIPLESWING JOINT, 1/2" MIPT INLET ANDOUTLET WITH A 12" LAY LENGTH, GPHIRRIGATION MODEL #GSJ0512. WITHPVC STREET ELL.

DRIP CONNECTIONC

DRIP TUBING LAYOUTE

UNDISTURBED SOILROOT BALL OF TREE OR PALMAMENDED BACKFILL MIX, SEE PLANTING PLANSDRIP LINE OF CANOPY TREE OR PALM 6" POP-UP STREAM BUBBLER HEAD WITHA 90° ARC PATTERN THREE (3) STREAM BUBBLER NOZZLE, SEE THE LEGEND FOR ALL 3/4" PVC LATERAL LINE PIPE FROM RCV
REQUIRED COMPONENTS. ADJUST THENOZZLE STREAMS TO WET THE ROOT BALL S 3/4" PVC LATERAL LINE PIPE3/4" PVC TEE FITTING
AND AMENDED SOIL AREA WITHOUT HITTING.

PLAN VIEW - N.T.S.
6"
THE TRUNK OF THE TREE OR PALM. SEE POP-UP SPRINKLER DETAIL FOR INSTALLATION.

POSITION MSBN-25Q STREAM BUBBLER HEADS 1" FROM THE ROOT BALL.

S
NOTE:POSITION MSBN-50Q STREAM BUBBLER HEADS 6" FROM THE ROOT BALL.

THE SOIL LEVEL IN THE PLANTER AREAS BE BROUGHT TO 4.5" BELOW FINISHEDGRADE AND PROPERLY COMPACTED AS PER THE LANDSCAPED DRAWINGS PRIORWIRE HOOP STAKES AT 5 FEET ON CENTER SPACING.INSTALL TUBING AS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND SECURE TO GRADE USINGTO THE INSTALLATION OF THE TUBING.TO INSURE EVEN PARALLEL AND LEVEL TUBING ROWS IT IS RECOMMENDED THATRECOMMENDED INSTALLATION:

AMENDED SOIL*
AMENDED SOIL/*INSTALLED AFTER TUBING INSTALLATION

FINISHED SOIL GRADETUBING INSTALLATIONBRING SOIL LEVEL
* AS PER LANDSCAPE DRAWINGSWIRE STAKETO 4.5" BELOW PRIOR TO DRIP 4"DRIP TUBING
BACKFILL FINAL 4.5" OF SOIL OVER THE TUBING AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE TUBINGAND OBSERVATION BY THE OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE.

DRIP TUBING LAYOUT (SECTION)D SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

TURF, SEE PLANTING PLANS
INSTALLED FIVE (5) FEET ON CENTERHEADER, PVC LATERAL LINE PIPE,1" MINIMUM SIZE, OTHERWISE TWO ADAPTER FITTINGS FOR THE CONNECTION.FOR CONNECTIONS IN THE MIDDLE OF RUNS OF TUBING, USE A TEE FITTING AND NOTE:DRIP TUBING CONNECTION REQUIRED FOR ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DRIP TUBING AND PVC HEADERS.FOR CONNECTIONS AT END RUNS OF TUBING, USE A 90° ELL FITTING AND ONE ADAPTER FITTING FOR CONNECTION.

FOR TEE FITTING, ONE (1) FOR 90° ELL

SHRUBS OR GROUND COVERS,
INLINE DRIP TUBING WITH INTERNAL DRIP EMITTERS, SEE LEGEND FOR BRAND,MODEL AND PERFORMANCEADAPTER FITTING, TWO (2) REQUIRED1/2" MIPT X 17mm BARB MALE

MULCH LAYER, SEE PLANTING PLANSSEE PLANTING PLANS

SIZE PER THE DRAWINGS
SCH. 80 PVC THREADED NIPPLE,1/2" X LENGTH AS REQUIRED

AMENDED SITE SOIL
12" MINIMUMGPH IRRIGATION PRODUCTS FLEXIBLE NIPPLE,TEE FITTING, HEADER SIZE BY 1/2"

FINISHED SOIL GRADE
#GFN050600, 1/2" MIPT X 1/2" FIPT X 6" LENGTHSCH. 40 PVC SLIP X SLIP X 1/2" FIPTDRIP TUBING SUPPLY OR DISCHARGE 4" IN SHRUB BEDS
GPH IRRIGATION PRODUCTS 9" PVC COATED WIRE STAKE, #GDTS140900, OR 90° ELL FITTING, 1/2" SIZESCH. 40 PVC THREADED TEE

POP-UP SPRINKLER HEADA
2"BRASS NIPPLES, LENGTHS AS REQUIRED

COPPER FEMALE ADAPTERTYPE K COPPER PIPE FROM WATER METER "SMOOTH TOUCH" STAINLESS STEEL
BRASS NIPPLE, 12" MINIMUM LENGTH
FINISH SOIL GRADEBRASS THREADED 90° ELL, FOUR (4)R/P PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW DEVICE WITH B
B
B
BC
BB B
A BRONZE WYE STRAINER AND TWO (2)BRASS BALL VALVES, SEE LEGEND FORBACKFLOW ASSEMBLY ENCLOSUREBRASS UNION, ONE (1) REQUIRED IF A CONCRETE SLABSPEARS 835-0XXSR SPECIAL REINFORCEDPVC MAINLINE TO MASTER VALVE 12" MIN.FLOWBRAND, MODEL AND SIZEIF SPECIFIEDB PRESSURE REGULATOR, IF SPECIFIED SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

PRV IS SPECIFIED, TWO (2) REQUIREDIF PRV NOT SPECIFIED, ONE (1) PER LEG CONCRETE SLAB SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 4" THICK, 18" WIDE AND EXTEND AT LEAST 8" PAST THE BACKFLOWASSEMBLY PIPING, OR BE THE SIZE REQUIRED BY THE ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURER.USE AN APPROVED, NON-HARDENING, TEFLON ASSEMBLY PASTE ON ALL THREADED FITTINGS.ASSEMBLY PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SIZED EQUAL TO THE SIZE OF THE BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICEBACKFLOW DEVICE OUTLET SHALL BE INSTALLED A MINIMUM OF 12" ABOVE FINISHED SOIL GRADE.NOTE:INSTALL THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ONLY IF IT IS SPECIFIED IN THE LEGEND.

B P SCH 80 PVC FEMALE ADAPTER
NO THREADED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE UNDER THE CONCRETE SLAB.

REQUIRED, TYPICAL

FINISHED SOILGRADE
PLAN VIEW - N.T.S.

INSTALL LATERAL LIPE IN A SLEEVEWHEN CROSSING PAVEMENT. 1 1/4" MIN. SIZE, 12" BELOW GRADEPVC SUPPLY HEADER, SEE PLANS, VALVES AND PIPE SHOWN IN PAVING FOR CLARITY ONLY, ALL TO BE INSTALLED IN PLANTER.

DRIPLINE AND PVC HEADERCONNECTION BETWEEN
PAVING SURROUNDING AND ADJACENT TO PLANTER AREATO THE PLANTER EDGE (PAVING) SHALL BE SPACED 4" FROM NOT TO EXCEED SPACING ON THE LEGEND. ROWS ADJACENT AS INDICATED ON THE LEGEND, ADJUST TO EVEN SPACING DRIPLINE TUBING ROWS, SPACING APPROXIMATELY

SHOWN ON PLANSEXTENDS TO LIMITSDRIPLINE TUBING
PLANS FOR SIZE, 1 1/4" MINIMUM,GRID OF DRIPLINE TUBING, SEEPVC LATERAL LINE TO ADJACENT

INSTALL ON DISCHARGE HEADERFLUSH VALVE / INDICATOR HEAD,

SHOWN ON PLANSEXTENDS TO LIMITSDRIPLINE TUBING
MINIMUM SIZE, 12" BELOW GRADEPVC LATERAL LINE, SEE PLANS, 1 1/4" SEE PLANS, 1 1/4" MINIMUM SIZE,PVC DISCHARGE HEADER,

FOR INSTALLATIONSEE PLANS AND DETAILSDRIP CONTROL VALVE F 1 1/4" MIN. SIZE, 12" BELOW GRADEPVC SUPPLY HEADER, SEE PLANS,12" BELOW GRADE, 16" IN INSTALLED 12" BELOW GRADE.

DRIPLINE AND PVC HEADERCONNECTION BETWEEN
THE PAVING EDGE. ALL ROWS SHALL BE PARALLEL AND AT THE SAME DEPTH.PLANS FOR SIZE, 1 1/4" MINIMUM,GRID OF DRIPLINE TUBING, SEEPVC LATERAL LINE TO ADJACENTINSTALLED 12" BELOW GRADE

END FEED SUPPLY HEADERCENTER FEED PVCSUPPLY HEADERFOR TUBING GRID, PER PLANS ACROSS PLANTED AREAS DRIPLINE TUBING EXTEND TUBING GRID (TYPICAL)PLANTED AREAS FOR DRIPLINEPVC HEADERS EXTEND ACROSS PVC SUPPLY AND DISCHARGE HEADERS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT END RUNS OF TUBING, NO MORE THAN 16" FROM THE EDGE OF THE HARDSCAPE. WHERE A TUBING

FROM HARDSCAPE EDGE

PROVIDE A PERIMETER ROW OF TUBING AROUND ENTIRE PLANTER 4"16"4"16"
4" INSIDE OF PAVEMENT EDGE
4"
DISCHARGE HEADERPVC HEADER 16" OFF OF PAVINGPVC HEADER 16" OFF OF PAVING ENTIRE PERIMETER OF PLANTING AREA SHALL HAVE A ROW OF DRIP TUBING INSTALLED 4" OFF OF THE EDGE OF THE HARDSCAPE AS SHOWN ABOVE. 4"
PVC PIPE FOR LATERALS, SUPPLY HEADERS AND DISCHARGE HEADERS SHALL BE MINIMUM 1 1/4" SIZE, OR SIZED AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. END RUN HAS ONLY TWO (2) OR THREE (3) ROWS, A PVC DISCHARGE HEADER IS NOT NEEDED AND THE PERIMETER ROW OF TUBING SHALL BE USED FOR THE DISCHARGE.WHERE FOUR (4) OR MORE TUBING ROWS END RUN, A PVC DISCHARGE HEADER IS REQUIRED.NOTE:

L6.03IRRIGATION DETAILSN.T.S.
256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 24
546-8L
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024
16" x 16" Top Entry Controller Assembly (ICA6 Series)1
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN

QUICK COUPLER VALVEK

REMOTE CONTROL VALVEL

MASTER CONTROL VALVEH

DRIP REMOTE CONTROL VALVEM CONTROLLER ASSEMBLYN
BALL VALVEJSECTION VIEW - N.T.S.
2"
2" MIN.

FINISHED SOIL GRADEIN SHRUB AREAS2"

FINISH SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREAS
24" WIRE LOOPS ANDPVC MAINLINE TO FLOWGPH GDBRY6 WATERPROOFSENSOR, PIPE PER PLANSWIRE CONNECTORS LANDSCAPE FABRIC TO3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL,4" MINIMUM DEPTHCOVER BOTTOM AND ALLSIDES OF VALVE BOX BRICK SUPPORTS,FOUR (4) REQUIRED

ELECTRIC MASTER CONTROLVALVE, SEE LEGEND FOR TYPE
MIN.PC

AND SPECIFICATIONSWIRE PATH TO CONTROLLER, IN CONDUIT
NOTE:

FLOW
USE STANDARD OPENINGS PROVIDED IN VALVE BOX FOR PIPE, DO NOT CUT BOX.

LASCO #896 PVC UNIONSLIP X MIPT, SIZE PER RCV,2 REQUIRED FOR ASSEMBLY PVC MAINLINE FROMBACKFLOW DEVICE ORBASKET STRAINER, USESCH 80 PVC 45° ELBOWSTO ACHIEVE MAINLINEDEPTH AS REQUIRED PLASTIC RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX WITH T-COVER ANDCAPTIVE STAINLESS STEEL BOLT AND LOC-KIT. INSTALLBOX AT RIGHT ANGLE TO ADJACENT HARDSCAPE EDGE.HEAT BRAND "MCV" ONTO LID.

BRASS FLOW SENSORI
2" MIN.

FINISHED SOIL GRADEIN SHRUB AREAS2"
FINISH SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREASHEAT BRAND "FS" ONTO LID.CAPTIVE STAINLESS STEEL BOLT AND LOC-KIT. INSTALLPLASTIC RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX WITH T-COVER ANDBOX AT RIGHT ANGLE TO ADJACENT HARDSCAPE EDGE. 24" WIRE LOOPS AND

PVC MAINLINE TO RCVS
3M DBY-6 WATERPROOF
PIPE PER PLANS AND SPECS.

WIRE CONNECTORS
LANDSCAPE FABRIC TO3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL,4" MINIMUM DEPTHCOVER BOTTOM AND ALLSIDES OF VALVE BOX BRICK SUPPORTS,4 REQUIREDFLOW SENSOR, SEE LEGENDFOR BRAND, MODEL AND SIZECONTROL WIRES TO CONTROLLER, IN CONDUITPVC MAINLINE FROMMASTER CONTROL VALVE, NOTE:USE STANDARD OPENINGS PROVIDED IN VALVE BOX FOR PIPE, DO NOT CUT BOX.

FLOW
USE SCH 80 PVC 45 DEGREE ELLS TO ACHIEVE MAINLINE DEPTH AS REQUIRED. 4" MIN.10 PIPE DIA.5 PIPE DIA.

NO FITTINGS WITHIN 10 PIPEDIA. UP STREAM AND 5 PIPEDIA. DOWN STREAM OF SENSORLASCO PVC MALE ADAPTERMPT X SLIP, SIZE PER FLOW SENSOR,2 REQUIRED FOR ASSEMBLY SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

CL LASCO "SLO-CLOSE" SCH. 80 PVC,

BRICK SUPPORTS,

FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN SHRUB AREAS

PVC IRRIGATION MAINLINE,
6" DIAMETER PVC CL. 160 PIPE, ONE CUBIC FOOT OF3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL 6"
THREE (3) REQUIRED
TRU-UNION BALL VALVE, WITH PVCLENGTH AS REQUIRED, 12" MINIMUM

SEE LEGEND FOR SPECIFICATION
SOCKET CONNECTIONS.

SOLVENT WELD PVC CONNECTIONS

SIZE PER MAINLINE SIZE
2"

FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREAS
SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.INSTALLED ON THE PROJECT.NOTE:PROVIDE ONE (1) 30" LONG STEEL "VALVE KEY" FOR EACH TEN (10) BALL VALVES PLASTIC 10" ROUND VALVE BOX WITH T-COVER ANDCAPTIVE STAINLESS STEEL BOLT AND LOCK-KIT. HEATBRAND "BV" ONTO LID.

USE AN APPROVED, NON-HARDENING, TEFLON ASSEMBLY PASTE ON ALL THREADED FITTINGS.USE STANDARD BOX OPENINGS FOR ALL PIPING INTO THE BOX, DO NOT CUT THE BOX. 2"
2" MIN.
2"
BRICK SUPPORTS,FOUR (4) REQUIREDLASCO #896 PVC UNIONSLIP X MIPT, SIZE PER RCV, MIN.PC
PVC MAINLINE PIPE RISER*, LENGTH AS REQUIRED3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL,4" MINIMUM DEPTH SCH. 80 PVC 90° ELL FITTING*

LANDSCAPE FABRIC TOCOVER BOTTOM AND ALLSIDES OF VALVE BOXELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROLVALVE, SEE LEGEND FOR TYPE

TAPE WIRES TO RISER USINGBLACK ELECTRICAL TAPE

FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREAS
LATERAL LINE, SIZE PER PLANS, TYPE PVC PIPE, AS 24" WIRE LOOPS ANDGPH GDBRY6 WATERPROOFWIRE CONNECTORSPVC MAINLINE PIPE* SCH. 80 PVC TEE OR 90° ELLFITTING ON MAINLINE,
ID VALVE NUMBER ID TAG, CHRISTY'S MODEL ID-STD-Y1
NOTE:

PER LEGEND
TWO (2) PER ASSEMBLYMAINLINE SIZE X RCV X RCV (TEE)OR MAINLINE SIZE X RCV (ELL)* ABOVE INDICATES SIZE PER RCV SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

PLASTIC RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX WITH T-COVER ANDCAPTIVE STAINLESS STEEL BOLT AND LOC-KIT. INSTALLBOX AT RIGHT ANGLE TO ADJACENT HARDSCAPE EDGE.HEAT BRAND "RCV" AND CONTROL STATION # ONTO LID.FINISHED SOIL GRADEIN SHRUB AREAS NOTE:USE STANDARD BOX OPENINGS FOR ALL PIPING INTO THE BOX, DO NOT CUT THE BOX.USE AN APPROVED, NON-HARDENING, TEFLON ASSEMBLY PASTE ON ALL THREADED FITTINGS.SECTION VIEW - N.T.S. 2" 2"
3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL,4" MINIMUM DEPTH
BRICK SUPPORTS,FOUR (4) REQUIRED

LINE, SIZE PER PLANS, TYPE
MIN.PC

AS LATERALPER LEGENDFLOW

DRIP SYSTEM WYE FILTER, SIZE PER RCVINLINE, PRE-SET PRESSURE REGULATOR, SIZE PER RCVFINISHED SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREAS 2" MIN.

ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROLVALVE, SEE LEGEND FOR TYPELANDSCAPE FABRIC TO COVER THEBOTTOM AND SIDES OF VALVE BOX

PVC PIPE,

TAPE WIRES TO RISER USINGBLACK ELECTRICAL TAPE
24" WIRE LOOPS ANDGPH GDBRY6 WATERPROOFWIRE CONNECTORS
ID VALVE NUMBER ID TAG, CHRISTY'S MODEL ID-STD-Y1
SCH. 80 PVC TEE OR 90° ELLFITTING ON MAINLINE,MAINLINE SIZE X RCV X RCV (TEE)OR MAINLINE SIZE X RCV (ELL)* ABOVE INDICATES SIZE PER RCV SCH. 80 PVC 90° ELL FITTING*PVC MAINLINE PIPE*PVC MAINLINE PIPE RISER*, LENGTH AS REQUIREDLASCO #896 PVC UNIONSLIP X MIPT, SIZE PER RCV,TWO (2) PER ASSEMBLY PLASTIC RECTANGULAR VALVE BOX (SIZE AS REQUIRED) WITHT-COVER AND CAPTIVE STAINLESS STEEL BOLT AND LOC-KIT.INSTALL BOX AT RIGHT ANGLE TO ADJACENT HARDSCAPEEDGE. HEAT BRAND "RCV" AND CONTROL STATION # ONTO LID.FINISHED SOIL GRADEIN SHRUB AREAS O
SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.USE A NON-HARDENING, TEFLON ASSEMBLY PASTE ON ALL THREADED FITTINGS.

CL QUICK COUPLING VALVE WITH 1" FIPT INLETFINISHED SOIL GRADE IN SHRUB AREAS3" THREADS AND A YELLOW VINYL LOCKING CAP2" LANDSCAPE FABRIC TO3/4" CRUSHED GRAVEL, 4" MINIMUM DEPTHCOVER BOTTOM AND ALLSIDES OF VALVE BOX LASCO SNAP-LOK PVC SWING JOINT WITHO-RINGS, A MALE 1" MIPT THREADED LAY LENGTH AND SNAP-LOK COLLAR. PVC INLET, PVC STABILIZER ELBOW, 12"

FINISHED SOIL GRADE IN TURF AREAS
BRICK SUPPORTS, THREE (3) REQUIRED
USE #G13S-218 WITH A 1" MIPT THREAD
REBAR STAKES, #3 X 24" LONG,
SCH. 80 PVC SST MAINLINE TEE FITTING,MAINLINE SIZE X 1" FIPT FOR CONNECTIONTO THE SWING JOINT TWO (2) REQUIRED
BRASS OUTLET.

WHEN USING A 3/4" QUICK COUPLER VALVE, USE A LASCO G13T-212 SWING JOINT WITH A 3/4" BRASS OUTLETFOR CONNECTION TO THE QCV INLET. ALL OTHER PARTS OF SWING JOINT SHALL REMAIN 1" SIZE.

COLORED T-COVER AND CAPTIVE STAINLESS PLASTIC 10" ROUND VALVE BOX WITH BLACK STEEL BOLT ANDLOCK-KIT. HEAT BRAND "QCV" ONTO LID.

NOTE:WHEN QCV IS LOCATED ON A MANIFOLD, USE A SCH. 80 SxT 90° ELBOW IN PLACE OF THE TEE FITTING. SIZE THE ELBOW AS MANIFOLD MAINLINE SIZE X 1" FIPT.

TIPPING RAIN BUCKET
L6.04IRRIGATION DETAILSN.T.S.
1" GRAY SCH. 40 PVC CONDUIT FOR RAIN SENSOR CABLE1" WEATHER HEADSTEEL POLE / LAMP POLE MOUNTING BRACKET (INCLUDED WITH SENSOR)SENSOR CABLE (200FT MAXIMUM)1RAIN SENSOR2345612 3 456
7IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY AND GROUNDINGROD SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY; REFER TOIRRIGATION CONTROLLER DETAIL 7 256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 25
546-8L
* Seal voids in conduit with
approved sealant such as
Zipseal or other.
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024
SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

UNDER PEDESTRIAN PAVINGPIPE SIZESA

PAVING, SEE SITE PLANSABC
DDDDD

IRRIGATION LATERAL LINE IN SLEEVEIRRIGATION MAINLINE IN SLEEVELOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRES,OR CONDUIT, IN SLEEVE

UNDISTURBED SITE SOILSAND BACKFILL COMPACTED TO
CLEAN SAND PIPE BEDDING, SEE CHARTSEPARATION BETWEEN PIPES AND TRENCH WALLS, SEE CHART12"B24"C24"D4"UNDER VEHICULAR PAVING36"36"6"

EQUAL DENSITY OF EXISTING SOILOR PAVING BASE MATERIAL
24"
SLEEVES SHALL BE TWICE THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE OR WIRE BUNDLE CARRIED WITHIN, EXCEPT WHENSLEEVES SHALL EXTEND 12" PAST THE EDGE OF PAVING INTO THE PLANTER.USING BELL AND GASKET PIPING WHERE MAINLINE SLEEVES SHALL BE 2.5 TIMES THE SIZE OF THE PIPE.CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO CONTACT 811 OR DIGALERT A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) DAYS PRIORTO ANY EXCAVATION ON THE PROJECT. DIAL 811 OR LOG ONTO WWW.DIGALERT.ORG.NOTE:

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN

SLEEVE INSTALLATIONP VALVE BOX LAYOUTR
12"12"12"
REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.5. BOX LOCATIONS SHALL BE STAKED IN THE FIELD PRIOR TO MAINLINE INSTALLATION FOR QCV BOX, TYPICAL 18"12"
BE INSTALLED IN TURF AREAS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.NOTE:VALVE BOXES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SHRUB AND GROUND COVER AREAS. NO VALVES SHALL

ALIGN BOX EDGESVALVE BOX, TYPICALBALL VALVE BOX, TYPICAL

EDGE OF TURF, WALKWAY, DRIVEWAY OR PAVING
18"
COLLAPSE AND / OR DEFORMATION OF VALVE BOXES.4. AVOID HEAVILY COMPACTING SOIL AROUND VALVE BOXES TO PREVENT THE EVER POSSIBLE, VALVES IN TURF AREAS TO BE APPROVED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.2. SET RCV AND VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY IN GROUND COVER OR SHRUB AREAS WHERE FACILITATE SERVICING OF THE VALVE OR EQUIPMENT.1. CENTER VALVE BOX OVER REMOTE CONTROL VALVE OR DRIP ASSEMBLY TO3. SET BOXES PARALLEL TO EACH OTHER AND PERPENDICULAR TO ADJACENT PAVING EDGE.

NOTE:

PLAN VIEW - N.T.S.

QCVRCVA13 RCVA15RCVA14BV
WIRE CONNECTIONQ SECTION VIEW - N.T.S.KIT SHALL INCLUDE A SCOTCHLOK SPRING CONNECTOR, A POLYPROPYLENE TUBE AND A 100% SILICONE WATERPROOF SEALING GEL. TUBE SHALL BE SUPPLIED PRE-FILLED WITH GEL.WIRE CONNECTOR SHALL BE A GPH IRRIGATION GDBRY6 DIRECT BURY SPLICE KIT.NOTE:

INSERTED INTO TUBE UNTIL THESCOTCHLOK CONNECTOR AND WIRESCONNECTOR PASSES LOCK TABS SILICONE WATERPROOF GELPOLY TUBE PRE-FILLED WITH 100%ONCE CONNECTOR IS INSERTEDLOCK TABS PREVENT WIRE REMOVAL SCOTCHLOK ELECTRICAL SPRINGCONNECTOR. WIRES SHALL BEPRE-STRIPPED OF 1/2" OF THE INSULATION PRIOR TO INSERTION CONNECTOR ONTO WIRES TO INTO THE CONNECTIOR. TWIST SEAT FIRMLY.

IS INSERTED INTO TUBEWIRES PASS THROUGH GROOVES INTUBE LID TO ALLOW LID TO CLOSECLOSE TUBE LID AFTER WIRELOW VOLTAGE WIRES, 3 MAXIMUM SSECTION VIEW - N.T.S.

SIZES 3" AND 4" SIZES 3/4" TO 2 1/2"PIPE SIZESA

FINISH SOIL GRADEABC
DDDDD

IRRIGATION NON-PRESSURE LATERAL LINEIRRIGATION PRESSURE MAINLINELOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRES,IN CONDUIT IF SPECIFIED ON LEGEND

UNDISTURBED SITE SOILCLEAN, COMPACTED BACKFILL SOIL,
CLEAN SOIL PIPE BEDDING, SEE CHARTSEPARATION BETWEEN PIPES AND TRENCH WALLS, SEE CHART12"18"B18"24"C18"24"D4"4"SIZES 6" AND LARGER30"24"6"

SEE SPECIFICATIONS
CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO CONTACT 811 OR DIGALERT A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) DAYS PRIOR TO ANY EXCAVATION ON THE PROJECT. DIAL 811 OR LOG ONTO WWW.DIGALERT.ORG.NOTE:

PIPE INSTALLATION
L6.05IRRIGATION DETAILSN.T.S.
256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 26
546-8L
NOTE:

1. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO CONTACT 811 OR DIGALERT A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) DAYS PRIOR TO ANY EXCAVATION ON THE PROJECT. DIAL 811 OR LOG ONTO WWW.

DIGALERT.COM

2. CONTROL WIRES LOCATED UNDER STREETS OR OTHER PERMANENT IMPROVEMENTS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SEPARATE PVC SLEEVES. 5-1/2"
36"
36"

PAVING, SEE SITE PLANSABC
DDDDD

IRRIGATION LATERAL LINE IN SLEEVEIRRIGATION MAINLINE IN SLEEVELOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRES,OR CONDUIT, IN SLEEVE

UNDISTURBED SITE SOILSAND BACKFILL COMPACTED TO

CLEAN SAND PIPE BEDDING, SEE CHARTSEPARATION BETWEEN PIPES AND TRENCH WALLS, SEE CHART

EQUAL DENSITY OF EXISTING SOILOR PAVING BASE MATERIAL
UNDER PEDESTRIAN PAVINGPIPE SIZESA12"B24"C24"D4"
UNDER PEDESTRIAN PAVING12"24"24"4"UNDER VEHICULAR PAVING36"36"6"24" SLEEVES SHALL BE TWICE THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE OR WIRE BUNDLE CARRIED WITHIN, EXCEPT WHENSLEEVES SHALL EXTEND 12" PAST THE EDGE OF PAVING INTO THE PLANTER.USING BELL AND GASKET PIPING WHERE MAINLINE SLEEVES SHALL BE 2.5 TIMES THE SIZE OF THE PIPE.CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO CONTACT 811 OR DIGALERT A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) DAYS PRIORTO ANY EXCAVATION ON THE PROJECT. DIAL 811 OR LOG ONTO WWW.DIGALERT.ORG.NOTE:
6" and greater - 36"
UNDER VEHICULAR PAVING36"36"6"24"

PIPE SIZESABCD
LESS THAN 3"
24"24"4"
18"
3" TO 5-1/2"
6" AND GREATER
24"24"4"
18"
18"
36"
36"
6" OR LESS
GREATER THAN 6"
18"
36"
36"
6"
24"
48"
48"
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

SubmittalDate100% SCHEMATIC DESIGN06/27/2023NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
RevisionDate
"AS BUILT"CIVIL ENGINEERDATERCEEXP.REVIEWED BY:INSPECTORDATESHEETSSHEETENGINEERING DEPARTMENTCITY OF CARLSBADIMPROVEMENT PLAN FOR:

I HAVE COMPLIED WITH THE CRITERIA OF THE IRRIGATIONGUIDELINES AND APPLIED THEM ACCORDINGLY FOR THEEFFICIENT USE OF WATER IN THE IRRIGATION DESIGN PLAN L6.06IRRIGATIONCLACULATIONS
N.T.S.
256

BY SEPARATE PERMIT

SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 27
546-8L
190,388
44 190,388
44 27.28

27.28 149,331

MONROE STREETLIMIT OF WORKPROPERTY LINE

LIMIT OF WORK
IRRIGATION POINT OF C REFER TO NOTE "A"
IRRIGATION CONTROLLER "A";REFER TO NOTE "B"POLE MOUNTED TIPPING RAINBUCK, CONTRACTOR TOCOORDINATE FOR FINALLOCATION IN THE FIELD.

EXISTING TREEPROTECT IN PLACE;REFER TO NOTE "F"
1"
1"
1"
HYDROZONE DIAGRAM.

REFER TO HYDROZONE TABLE
3rd PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL08/09/2024

NOPARKING

EVCHARGINGONLYNO PARKING

EVCHARGINGONLYEVCHARGINGONLY

COMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACTCOMPACT

COMPACT

NOPARKING

1.5%

1.5%1.5%1.5%

1.5%

1.5%1.5%

1.5%

1.6%1.0%1.0%

1.6%

1.3%1.3%

1.1%1.3%

1.3%

1.1%1.1%1.8%

1.0%

1.0%1.8%1.5%1.2%0.7%

1.5%

1.6%

5.0%1.5%

0.9%

1.6%

1.1%

0.9%

2.5%8.0%7.3%1.1%

1.7%
(4.7%)
(5.3%)

1.5%1.0%

1.0%1.9%1.4%(2.5%)3.2%1.0%3.3%2.7%1.5%2.0%4.5%

1.8%7.6%0.6%1.0%1.8%

1.0%1.2%1.8%1.2%1.5%0.8%

2.4%0.9%

0.8%1.5%

1.3%1.3%

1.1%

3.8%4.6%

1.8%

0.5%

1.5% 0.6%1.4%1.4%

0.6%2.6%1.5%

0.7%1.5% ESHT 6

1.9%
SS
CO
CO
202203204205 207208208
208208
208
205
208208 208208
207
204203202 206
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

LINEAR ROOT BARRIER
(*)- UNLESS NOTED ON PLANDETAIL(NCN.)- NO COMMON NAMESYM.QTY.REF.SPACINGCOMMON NAMETREE LISTSIZE/

SHRUB / GROUND COVER LIST
BOTANICAL NAME/COMMENTS/T2
S3S4S2S1
12/L7.02
S5
ET1
S6S7S8S9S10
PODOCARPUS GRACILIOR/FERN PINEEXISTING TREE TO REMAIN36" BOX/PER PLAN2.10/L7.02GEIJERA PARVIFLORAAUSTRALIAN WILLOW36" BOX/ MULTIPER PLAN2,10/L7.02

SALVIA LEUCANTHA 'SANTABARBARA'/ MEXICAN BUSH SAGEMUHLENBERGIA RIGIDA'NASHVILLE'LOMANDRA LONGIFOLIA BREEZE/DWARF MAT RUSHJUNCUS PATENS/ ELK BLUE

PLANTING LEGEND
ET2EXISTING PALMS TO REMAIN
CALLISTEMON VIMINALIS 'LITTLEJOHN'CAREX PRAEGRACILLIS/CALIFORNIA FIELD SEDGECALAMAGROSTIS X ACUTIFLORA'KARL FORESTER'AGAVE BLUE FLAME15 GAL/ PER PLANBACCHARIS PILULARIS 'PIGEONPOINT'

FICUS PUMILA
PROTECT INPLACE;SEE 04/L7.02PROTECT INPLACE;SEE 04/L7.0216,17/L7.02 15/L7.02
36" BOX/PER PLAN1 GAL/60" O.C.5 GAL/36" O.C.5 GAL/PER PLAN1 GAL/24" O.C.1 GAL/24" O.C.1 GAL/72" O.C.1 GAL/36" O.C.1 GAL/18" O.C.5 GAL/42" O.C. 8494
WUCOLS
1612
ML--LLLMLMMLMLINSTALL AT TREES LOCATED WITHIN 5' OF HARDSCAPE 16,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.0216,17/L7.02

N MONROE STREETLIMIT OF WORKPROPERTY LINE
07PLANTING PLAN1" = 20'-0"
T1TYP.

LIMIT OF WORKS7S9T1TYP.

S5
ET2TYP.S9
S8S8S10ET1S8S9S9S9
TYP.

S11S10S1
S6S9S3
S8
S9 EXISTING CALLISTEMONVIMINALIS 'LITTLE JOHN' TOREMAINEXISTING MUHLENBERGIARIGIDA 'NASHVILLE' TOREMAIN EXISTING CALLISTEMONVIMINALIS 'LITTLE JOHN' TOREMAIN. PRUNE HEDGESTO 30" HEIGHT MAX. TOMAINTAIN SITE VISIBILITY.S9 ET1TYP.ET2
ET1S1
S4
T2
TYP.S8
ET1S3TYP.

S3
L7.01PLANTING PLAN-
S10
TYP.

TYP.

TYP.(E) BLDG
BLDG
S1S4S10S4
S7
28 BIOFILTRATIONWITH PARTIALRETENTION-TYPE PR-1
S3
25' CLR.SIGHT,TYP
25' CLR.SIGHT,TYP

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
ARCHITECTURE ENGINEERING INTERIOR DESIGNLANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING949-261-1001 OfficeLPADesignStudios.com5301 California Avenue, Suite 100Irvine, California 92617 Job NumberChecked ByScaleThis document and all other project documents, ideas,aesthetics and designs incorporated therein areinstruments of service. All project documents arecopyright protected, are the property of LPA, Inc. (LPA)and cannot be lawfully used in whole or in part for anyproject or purpose except as set forth in the contractualagreement between LPA and its Client. The unauthorizeddisclosure and/or use of the project documents (includingthe creation of derivative works), may give rise to liabilityfor copyright infringement, unlawful disclosure, use ormisappropriation of property rights held by LPA. Theunauthorized use of the project documents will give riseto the recovery of monetary losses and damagesincluding attorney fees and costs for which theunauthorized user will be held liable.Project documents describe the design intent of the workand are not a representation of as-built or existingconditions. LPA is not responsible for any discrepanciesbetween the project documents and the existingconditions.© LPA, Inc.

PREVAILING PLAN VIEW A

SECTION B

LEGENDB-
A-

ROOTBALL
TREE STAKING AND PLANTING DETAIL1/4"=1'-0"-NOTE:A.PROVIDE (2) 6" DIA. x 6' DEEP AUGER HOLES IF EXCAVATED HOLE DOES NOT DRAIN FASTERTHAN 1" PER HOUR AS DETERMINED BY SOILS REPORT AND FIELD CONDITIONS.

NOT USED(3) MIN. 30" DEPTH MINIMUM ARBOR STAKES FOR TREES 3" CALIPER BOX AND SMALLER.DRIVE STAKE THROUGH ROOT BALL AND EMBED STAKE 6"-8" INTO NATIVE SOIL. PROVIDELOCKING TABS ONTO STAKE AND REMOVE EXCESS PER MANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATIONS. AVAILABLE THROUGH ARBOR STAKE. PROVIDE (1) STAKE PER CALIPERINCH GREATER THAN 3". PROVIDE BIODEGRADABLE LOCK PER STAKE.FINISH GRADEWATER BASIN. 4" MIN. DEPTH FOR 5 GAL. & LARGERIN LAWN AREAS AND AS DIRECTED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.AMENDED BACKFILL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MIX AND PIT SIZE.SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM OF PLANTING PIT.EXISTING SOIL.PLANT TABLET. PER SPECS.SET TOP OF ROOTBALL X" ABOVE SURROUNDING GRADE AND SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE.PROVIDE 2' DIA. MULCH RING AT TREES WITHIN TURF. ADJUST HEIGHT OF TREE PLANTING TOACCOMMODATE SETTLING DUE TO SOIL TYPE.3" MULCH, MAINTAIN CONSTANTLY.COMPACTED BACKFILL. PUDDLE AND SETTLE PRIOR TO SETTING TREE.12" WIDE TRENCH ALONG ONE SIDE. FILL WITH 3/4" DRAIN GRAVEL.4" PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE PLACED HORIZONTAL."MIRAFI" 140N FILTER FABRIC.4" NIBCO, BLACK - 'ABS' PLUG 4" NIBCO, BLACK - 'ABS' FEMALE RECIEVER NDS, WHITE 'PVC'ADAPTOR FOR CONNECTION FROM FEMALE RECIEVER TO PVC SOLID STAND PIPEUNDISTURBED EXISTING SOIL TO FORM PEDESTAL AND PREVENT SETTLING. REPLACE WITHCOMPACTED NATURAL SOIL IF HARDPAN EXISTS.TREE CANOPYBOTTOM OF ROOTBALL/ TOP OF PEDESTAL.BASE OF PEDESTAL FOR TREE.ROOTBALL4" 12345678910111213141516171819
2 34
5 567
8 8910
11 12
12 13
13 14
15 1516
1718
1819
19 12"MIN.
2 0410 TREE PROTECTION FENCE1/4" = 1'-0"-
1EXISTING TREE, PROTECT IN PLACE.TREE PROTECTION FENCE: GALVANIZEDSTEEL FENCING WITH 0.148" DIAMETERCHAINLINK FABRIC.2 78" O.D. OUTSIDE AND CORNERGALVANIZED STEEL POSTS3" THICK LAYER OF MULCHMAINTAIN EXISTING GRADE AT THE BASEOF THE TREE PROTECTION FENCE UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS.8.5" X 11" PLASTIC LAMINATED SIGNSPACED AT 35' O.C.NOTES:A.NO PRUNING SHALL BE PERFORMEDEXCEPT BY CITY OR CITY APPROVEDARBORIST.B.NO EQUIPMENT SHALL OPERATEINSIDE THE PROTECTIVE FENCINGINCLUDING DURING FENCEINSTALLATION AND REMOVAL.C.SEE PLANS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. 23456
6'-0"SECTION VIEW
KEEP OUT:TREEPROTECTIONAREA
1 23564

ROOT PROTECTION ZONE (RPZ) TO MATCH DRIP LINEUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ROOTBALLROOTBALL45°

SECTION CSECTION B

PLAN VIEW A

C--- C---B---
A---

ROOTBALL
TREE GUYING AND PLANTING DETAIL1/4"=1'-0"-NOTE:PROVIDE (2) 6" DIA. x 6' DEEP AUGER HOLES IF EXCAVATED HOLE DOESNOT DRAIN FASTER THAN 1" PER HOUR AS DETERMINED BY SOILSREPORT AND FIELD CONDITIONS.

WHITE SURGICAL TUBING OVER ENTIRE LENGHT OF GUYWIRE (TYP.) 3 REQUIRED.4" NIBCO, BLACK - 'ABS' PLUG 4" NIBCO, BLACK - 'ABS' FEMALERECIEVER NDS, WHITE 'PVC' ADAPTOR FOR CONNECTIONFROM FEMALE RECIEVER TO PVC SOLID STAND PIPEDUCKBILL EARTH ANCHORING SYSTEM.BLACK PLASTIC TIES.GUY WIRE W/TURN BUCKLE AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT TREE(3-REQUIRED). PART OF DUCKBILL EARTH ANCHORINGSYSTEM.PLANT TABLETS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS.AMENDED BACKFILL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MIX + PITSIZE.(NOT USED)COMPACTED BACKFILL, PUDDLE & SETTLE PRIOR TOSETTLING TREE.12" WIDE TRENCH ALONG ONE SIDE FILL W/ 3/4" DRAINGRAVEL.SET TOP OF ROOTBALL 2" ABOVE SURROUNDING GRADE ANDSLOPE FOR DRAINAGE. PROVIDE 2' DIA. MULCH RING ATTREES WITHIN TURF. ADJUST HEIGHT OF TREE PLANTING TOACCOMODATE SETTLING DUE TO SOIL TYP. (MAY BE ADJUSTED VERIFYW/ LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.)12"24"ROOTBALL24" 1234567891011
211520197610132
41216318921
51112672014101317
201721
2 16
79141013152X ROOTBALL12"MIN.
3" MULCH, MAINTAIN CONSTANTLY.4" PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE. PLACEDHORIZONTAL."MIRAFI" 140N FILTER FABRIC WRAPPINGDRAIN GRAVEL, OVERLAPPING SEPERATEPIECES @ 6".EXISTING SOIL.WATER BASIN. 6" MIN. DEPTH. REMOVE BASININ LAWN AREAS AND AS DIRECTED BYLANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.UNDISTURBED EXISTING SOIL TO FORMPEDESTAL & PREVENT SETTLING OF TREE.REPLACE WITH COMPACTED NATURAL SOILIF HARDPAN EXISTS.SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM OF PLANTINGPIT.TREE CANOPYBOTTOM OF ROOTBALL/ TOP OF PEDESTAL.BASE OF PEDESTAL FOR TREE. 12131415161718192021
1"ROOTBALLLEGEND
LINEAR ROOT BARRIER1 1/2"=1'-0"-BASE MATERIAL FROM ADJACENT HARDSCAPE.COMPACTED SUBGRADE FROM ADJACENT HARDSCAPE.NOTE:A.VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, OR SIDEWALK.LINEAR ROOT BARRIER BY 'DEEP ROOT'. SEE PLANTING PLAN. MODEL # UB24-2FINISH GRADE.ADJACENT ROOTBALL. VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION AND PROTECT AT ALL TIMES.123456 65 4321
02 12
29 VERTICAL SURFACE
LEGEND
BALLROOT6"6"VINE PLANTING1" = 1'-0"-
SPREAD ON WALL OR GREENSCREEN AND SPREAD ON WALLAND SECURE WITH 'TUMAX PLANTANCHOR' VINE TIES ATTACHED TOWALL WITH CLEAR SILICONE GLUE.DO NOT USE WIRE OR METAL TOTIE VINES. USE WHITE, BLACK ORGREEN VINYL ATTACHMENTS TOCONNECT VINES TO WALL TIESOR GREEN SCREEN.REMOVE NURSERY STAKE3" MULCH LAYER, MAINTAINCONSTANTLY. SEESPECIFICATIONS UNLESSOTHERWISE INDICATED ON PLAN.ADJACENT MATERIAL SEE PLANPLANTING TABLETSCOMPACTED BACKFILL, SEESPECS.SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM OFPLANTING PIT.TOP OF ROOTBALL TO BE 1/2"BELOW FINISH SURFACE.UNDISTURBED EXISTING SOIL TOFORM PEDESTAL. REPLACE W/COMPACTED SOIL IF HARDPANEXISTS. 23456789
1128347569
9"MIN/ 12" MAX
15 LEGEND:

ROOTBALL
16-
12345 891011
12345678
9 1011
NOTE:A.FOR SHRUB SPACING SEE
1 TO 15 GALLON SHRUB; REFER TOPLANTING PLAN.SET CROWN OF ROOTBALL 1" ABOVEFINISH GRADE AND SLOPE SOIL AWAYFROM ROOTBALL. ADJUST HEIGHT OFPLANTING TO ACCOMODATE SETTLINGDUE TO SOIL TYPES.WATER BASIN. 4" MIN. FOR 5 GAL. &LARGER. 2" MIN FOR 1 GAL.FINISH GRADEAMENDED BACKFILL; SEE SPECS FORMIX.

PLANT TABLET; SEE SPECS.SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM OFPLANTING PIT.EXISTING SOIL.3" MULCH, MAINTAIN CONSTANTLY. SEESPECS.COMPACTED BACKFILL; SEE SPECS.PUDDLE AND SETTLE PRIOR TO SETTINGSHRUB.UNDISTURBED EXISTING SOIL TO FORMPEDESTAL. REPLACE WITH COMPACTEDNATURAL SOIL IF HARDPAN EXISTS.SHRUB PLANTING DETAIL3/4" = 1'-0" 762X SIZE OF ROOT BALLROOTBALL6"
17 LEGEND:123
12 3

EQUALEQUALEQUAL
TRIANGULAR SPACING1/4" = 1'-0"-
LOCATE PLANTS WITH EQUAL SPACING AS INDICATED ON PLAN(TRIANGULAR SPACING).1/2 ON CENTER SPACING.PAVING, BUILDING, OR HEADER SHOWING PLANTING AREALIMIT.16

NOT FORE REGULATORYAPPROVAL, PERMITTING ORCONSTRUCTION
conditions. LPA is not res
pancies between the projec
sting conditions.
.

LICENSED LANDSCA PE ARCHITECT

STATE OF CA L I FORNIA
JEFFREY K. YA MA MOTO No. 5030

RENEWAL DATE

SIGNATURE
DATE
07/31/2023
06/15/2023
07/31/2025
04/30/2024
29 © Copyright 2023

PROJECT MANUAL

EL RANCHO HIGH SCHOOL

POOL REPLACEMENT

6501 Passons Boulevard, Pico Rivera, CA
DSA Backcheck
June 15, 2023

Developed For:

El Rancho Unified School District
9333 Loch Lomond Drive
Pico Rivera, CA 90660

Volume 1 of 1
Divisions 01-33
LPA Project No. 30506.01
DSA Application #03
DSA Approval
TEST MARK (For DSA Use Only) Prior to adding document to the Session the Plan Reviewer shall place this test mark off the top edge of the first sheet and change status to
"INCORPORATE". If Back-check menu does not show or the
color does not change to green, the Plan Reviewer shall fix the back-check menu. For guidance on how to fix the back-check menu, refer to "_DSA EPR Support > Help Desk > Fixing Back Check Menu"

MONROE POOL REPLACEMENT

CITY OF CARLSBAD
Developed For:

City of Carlsbad
1635 Faraday Avenue
Carlsbad, CA 92008
3401 Monroe Avenue, Carlsbad CA
January 29, 2024
LPA Project No. 19027.10
May 1
City Project No. PUB2023-0004

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 FOR REGULATORY

APPROVAL & PERMITTING

3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank

Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS

1.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. 01 10 00 - Summary
B. 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures
C. 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
D. 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
E. 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule
F. 013513 - Special Project Procedures - Design Presentation G. 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
H. 01 56 39 – Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
I. 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
J. 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions K. 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
L. 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal M. 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
N. 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training
O. 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements
P. 01 91 14 - Commissioning Authority Responsibilities

1.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. 02 41 00 - Demolition

1.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A. 03 01 00 - Maintenance of Concrete
B. 03 05 16 – Underslab Vapor Barrier - Stefo
C. 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
D. 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
E. 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
F. 03 30 05 - Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture for Cast-in-Place Concrete - AVECS G. 03 35 45 - Polished Concrete and Concrete Topping - Floor Seal Technology

1.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY
A. 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
B. 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
C. 04 22 11 – Unit Masonry Finishes

1.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A. 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
B. 05 31 00 - Steel Decking
C. 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing
D. 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule
01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
01 56 39 – Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01 60 00 - Product Requirements
01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training
01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements
01 91 14 - Commissioning Authority Responsibilities

1.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. 02 41 00 - Demolition

1.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A. 03 01 00 - Maintenance of Concrete
B. 03 05 16 – Underslab Vapor Barrier - Stefo
C. 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
D. 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
E. 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 30 05 - Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture for Cast-in-Place Concrete - AVECS

1.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY
A. 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
B. 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
C. 04 22 11 – Unit Masonry Finishes

1.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A. 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
B. 05 31 00 - Steel Decking
C. 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing
D. 05 52 13 - Pipe and Tube Railings
E. 05 70 00 - Decorative Metal

1.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
B. 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 2
E. 05 70 00 - Decorative Metal

1.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
B. 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework

1.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. 07 54 23 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane Roofing - Carlisle B. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
A. 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. 08 11 16 – Aluminum Doors and Frames
C. 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts
D. 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
E. 08 83 00 - Mirrors
F. 08 91 00 - Louvers

1.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
A. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. 09 30 00 - Tiling
C. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating - Commercial Facility Guide Specification - Sherwin-Williams D. 09 91 23 - Interior Painting

1.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
A. 10 14 00 - Signage
B. 10 51 13 - Metal Lockers

1.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

1.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
A. 12 24 00 - Window Shades
B. 12 32 00 - Manufactured Wood Casework
C. 12 36 00 - Countertops

1.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. 13 11 00 - Swimming Pool General Requirements
B. 131101 - Swimming Pool Excavation
C. 131102 - Swimming Pool Concrete
D. 131103 - Swimming Pool Shotcrete
E. 131104 - Swimming Pool Ceramic Tile
F. 131105 - Swimming Pool Plaster
G. 131106 - Swimming Pool Equipment
H. 131107 - Swimming Pool Mechanical
I. 131108 - Swimming Pool Electrical
J. 131163 – Swimming Pool Solar Heating

1.14 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

1.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. 07 54 23 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane Roofing - Carlisle B. 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
A. 10 14 00 - Signage
B. 10 21 13.17 - Phenolic Toilet Compartments
C. 10 28 00 - Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories
D. 10 51 23 - Plastic Lockers

1.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

1.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
A. 12 24 00 - Window Shades
B. 12 32 00 - Manufactured Wood Casework
C. 12 36 00 - Countertops

1.14 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
B. 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 F. 08 91 00 - Louvers

1.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
A. 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. 09 30 00 - Tiling
C. 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating - Commercial Facility Guide Specifica D. 09 91 23 - Interior Painting

1.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
A. 10 14 00 - Signage
B. 10 51 13 - Metal Lockers

1.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

1.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
A. 12 24 00 - Window Shades
B. 12 32 00 - Manufactured Wood Casework
C. 12 36 00 - Countertops

1.14 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
D. 09 91 23 - Interior Painting

1.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
A. 10 14 00 - Signage
B. 10 21 13.17 - Phenolic Toilet Compartments
C. 10 28 00 - Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories
D. 10 51 23 - Plastic Lockers

1.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

1.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
A. 12 24 00 - Window Shades
B. 12 32 00 - Manufactured Wood Casework
C. 12 36 00 - Countertops

1.14 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
B. 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems
A. 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
C. 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings
D. 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting
F. 09 96 00 - High Performance Coatings
F. 08 91 00 - Louvers
D. 09 91 23 - Interior Painting
B.

E.
3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 3
B. 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems

1.15 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING
A. 22 01 30 – Common Work Results for Plumbing
B. 22 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping C. 22 05 17 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping D. 22 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
E. 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment F. 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment G. 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment H. 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
I. 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping
J. 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
K. 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment
L. 22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
M. 22 45 00 – Emergency Plumbing Fixtures

1.16 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC
B. 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
D. 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment E. 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC F. 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation
G. 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation
H. 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC
I. 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
J. 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings
K. 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories
L. 23 34 23 - HVAC Power Ventilators
M. 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
N. 23 40 00 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices
O. 23 81 29 - Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems

1.17 DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

1.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
A. 26 05 05 - Selective Demolition for Electrical
B. 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables C. 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D. 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems E. 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
F. 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
G. 26 05 33.23 - Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 4
H. 26 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems I. 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
J. 26 05 73 - Power System Studies
K. 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections
L. 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices
M. 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance
N. 26 22 00 - Low-Voltage Transformers
O. 26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear
P. 26 24 13 - Switchboards
Q. 26 24 16 - Panelboards
R. 26 27 13 - Electricity Metering
S. 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
T. 26 28 13 - Fuses
U. 26 28 16.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers
V. 26 28 16.16 - Enclosed Switches
W. 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers
X. 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors
Y. 26 33 23 - Central Battery Equipment
Z. 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices
AA. 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting
BB. 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting

1.19 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
A. 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling System
B. 27 41 00 – Audiovisual System Specifications
C. 27 51 29 – Area of Refuge Signal System

1.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. 28 10 00 – Access Control Security Alarm System
B. 28 20 00 – Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV)
C. 28 31 11 - Building Intrusion Detection
D. 28 46 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm - Notifier ONYX (Fire Command Systems)

1.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A. 31 10 00 - Site Clearing
B. 31 22 00 - Grading

1.20 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. 28 10 00 – Access Control Security Alarm System
B. 28 20 00 – Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV)
C. 28 31 11 - Building Intrusion Detection
28 46 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm - Notifier ONYX (Fire Command Systems)

1.21 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A. 31 10 00 - Site Clearing
B. 31 22 00 - Grading

1.22 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
A. 32 01 09 – Landscape Maintenance
B. 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses
C. 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving
D. 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving
E. 32 13 73 – Pavement Joint Sealers
F. 32 17 23 - Pavement Markings
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 5
G. 32 17 26 - Tactile Warning Surfacing
H. 32 31 19 – Tube Steel Fences and Gates
I. 32 33 00 - Site Furnishings
J. 32 33 53 – Architectural Site Concrete
K. 32 84 00 – Landscape Irrigation
L. 32 91 19 – Landscape Grading
M. 32 90 00 – Landscape Work

1.23 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES
A. 33 14 16 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping
B. 33 31 13 - Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping
C. 33 42 11 - Stormwater Gravity Piping

1.24 APPENDIX A – ASBESTOS REPORT
END OF SECTION 00 01 10
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Summary 01 10 00 - 1
SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement.

B. Owner's Name: City of Carlsbad, California.

C. The Project consists of the construction of Replacement of existing pool, pool deck and pool pump building. Interior of existing pool facilities building remodeled and new addition to existing pool facilities building. New shading structures over pool and site improvements and added parking. .

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK
A. Scope of demolition and removal work is indicated on drawings and specified in Section 02 41

00. B. Abatement as required per Asbestos and Lead Survey provided in specifications in Appendix A.

1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.

B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.

C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

B. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the exisitng building is not permitted.

END OF SECTION 01 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank

Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1
SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 012500.01 - LPA Substitution Form: Required form for substitution requests.

B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, coordination.

C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, product options, delivery, storage, and handling.

D. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Restrictions on emissions of indoor substitute products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products, assemblies, and equipment.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control.
a. Unavailability.
b. Regulatory changes.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Proposed due to possibility of offering substantial advantage to the Project.
a. Substitution requests offering advantages solely to the Contractor will not be considered.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system.

2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.

3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

5. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.

B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.

1. Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics.

C. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response.

1. Forms included in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and must be used.

D. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.

1. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into single document.

3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT
A. Submittal Time Restrictions:

1. Instructions to Bidders specifies time restrictions and the documents required for submitting substitution requests during the bidding period.

B. Submittal Form (before award of contract):

1. Submit substitution requests by completing the form attached to this section. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.

3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Submittal Form (after award of contract):

1. Submit substitution requests by completing the form attached to this section. See this section for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.

B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement.

C. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule.

D. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule.

1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways.

2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors.

3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of:
a. Owner's compensation to the Architect for any required redesign, time spent processing and evaluating the request.

E. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances:

1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without having received prior approval.

2. Without a separate written request.

3. When acceptance will require revisions to Contract Documents.

3.04 RESOLUTION
A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision.

Provide this data in an expeditious manner.

B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

END OF SECTION 01 25 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Substitution Request Form 01 25 00.01 - 1
SECTION 012500.01

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Project Name: Job No.:

Date:

To: Architect:

LPA, Inc.

Contractor:

Specified Item:

Specification Section Paragraph No. Drawing No. Detail No.

Contractors Proposed Substitution:

Reason for Request: _______________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer: _______________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer Contract: _______________________________________________________________________________ Trade Name and Model: ____________________________________________________________________________ History: ☐ New Product ☐ 1-4 Years in market ☐ 5-10 years in Market ☐ Over 11 years in market Mandatory for Consideration: Specification Section 012500 – Substitution Procedures ☐ Drawings ☐ Product Data ☐ Samples ☐ Test Data ☐ Reports ☐Other ____________ Attach a Point by Point Comparison between proposed product and product indicated. Provide complete data for proposed product, including product/material descriptions, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, MSDS data sheet and test data adequate for evaluation of the request. Clearly annotate applicable portions of the data. Include ICC Evaluation Service (ICC ES) Evaluation Report, if applicable.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Substitution Request Form 01 25 00.01 - 2
The Undersigned certifies:
 Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equivalent or superior in all respects to specified product.
 Proposed substitution complies with applicable Codes, ordinances and standards.  Proposed substitution complies with Contract requirements.  Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as specified products.  Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, are available.  Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.  Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs cause by the substitution.

Submitted by: (name) __________________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Signed: ______________________________________________________ Date: _______________________________

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
Architect’s Recommended Action:
☐ Approved. Refer to the change document noted under Remarks below. ☐ Rejected – Use specified product/material.

Name: ______________________________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 1
SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General administrative requirements.

B. Preconstruction meeting.

C. Site mobilization meeting.

D. Progress meetings.

E. Construction progress schedule.

F. Coordination drawings.

G. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

H. Number of copies of submittals.

I. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures.

J. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: General product requirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

1.04 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities.

B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect:

1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI).

2. Requests for substitution.

3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.

4. Test and inspection reports.

5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.

6. Applications for payment and change order requests.

7. Progress schedules.

8. Coordination drawings.

9. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

10. Closeout submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner.

2. Architect.

3. Contractor.

4. Project Inspector.

C. Agenda:

1. Submission of list of subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule.

2. Submission of initial Submittal schedule.

3. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect.

4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, RFIs, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

5. Scheduling.

6. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

7. Sustainable design requirements.

8. Labor law requirements, including payment and reporting requirements.

D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor

2. Owner

3. Contractor's superintendent
C. Agenda:

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

2. Owner's requirements.

3. Work restrictions.

4. Work hours.

5. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.

6. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.

7. Survey and building layout.

8. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

9. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

10. Construction waste management and recycling.

11. Parking availability.

12. Office, work, and storage areas.

13. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

14. First aid.

15. Security and housekeeping procedures.

16. Schedules.

17. Application for payment procedures.

18. Procedures for testing.

19. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

20. Requirements for start-up of equipment.

21. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum weekly intervals.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.

2. Owner.

3. Architect.

4. Contractor's superintendent.

C. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Review of RFIs log and status of responses.

7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

8. Maintenance of progress schedule.

9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

10. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

11. Coordination of projected progress.

12. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

14. Other business relating to work.

D. Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE
A. Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioing Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Coordination of separate contracts.
e. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
f. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. g. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - SEE SECTION 01 32 16

3.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect.

3.07 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following:

1. An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in Contract Documents.

2. A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent.

B. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI.

C. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work.

1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item.
a. Review, coordinate, and comment on requests originating with subcontractors and/or materials suppliers.
b. Do not forward requests which solely require internal coordination between subcontractors.

2. Prepare using an electronic version of the form appended to this section.

3. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred.

D. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included.

1. Include in each request Contractor's signature attesting to good faith effort to determine from Contract Documents information requiring interpretation.

2. Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following::
a. Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b. Approval of substitutions (see Section - 01 60 00 - Product Requirements) c. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract).

3. Improper RFIs: Requests not prepared in compliance with requirements of this section, and/or missing key information required to render an actionable response. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation.

4. Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on, or reasonably inferable from, Contract Documents, with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. a. The Owner reserves the right to assess the Contractor for the costs (on time-and- materials basis) incurred by the Architect, and any of its consultants, due to processing of such RFIs.

E. Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI, and information necessary to provide an actionable response.

1. Official Project name and number, and any additional required identifiers established in Contract Documents.

2. Owner's, Architect's, and Contractor's names.

3. Discrete and consecutive RFI number, and descriptive subject/title.

4. Issue date, and requested reply date.

5. Reference to particular Contract Document(s) requiring additional information/interpretation. Identify pertinent drawing and detail number and/or specification section number, title, and paragraph(s).

6. Annotations: Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered the request.

7. Contractor's suggested resolution: A written and/or a graphic solution, to scale, is required in cases where clarification of coordination issues is involved, for example; routing, clearances, and/or specific locations of work shown diagrammatically in Contract Documents. If applicable, state the likely impact of the suggested resolution on Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

F. Attachments: Include sketches, coordination drawings, descriptions, photos, submittals, and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request.

G. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project if PROCORE software is not used.

1. Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis.

2. Note dates of when each request is made, and when a response is received.

3. Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response.

4. Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date.

5. Identify and include improper or frivolous RFIs.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 5
H. Review Time: Architect will respond and return RFIs to Contractor within seven calendar days of receipt. For the purpose of establishing the start of the mandated response period, RFIs received after 12:00 noon will be considered as having been received on the following regular working day.

1. Response period may be shortened or lengthened for specific items, subject to mutual agreement, and recorded in a timely manner in progress meeting minutes.

I. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner.

1. Response may include a request for additional information, in which case the original RFI will be deemed as having been answered, and an amended one is to be issued forthwith.

Identify the amended RFI with an R suffix to the original number.

2. Do not extend applicability of a response to specific item to encompass other similar conditions, unless specifically so noted in the response.

3. Upon receipt of a response, promptly review and distribute it to all affected parties, and update the RFI Log.

3.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format.

1. Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedule specified in Section - 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule.

2. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values.

3. Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction.

4. Arrange information to include scheduled date for initial submittal, specification number and title, submittal category (for review or for information), description of item of work covered, and role and name of subcontractor.

5. Account for time required for preparation, review, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates. a. For assemblies, equipment, systems comprised of multiple components and/or requiring detailed coordination with other work, allow for additional time to make corrections or revisions to initial submittals, and time for their review.

3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.

2. Shop drawings.

3. Samples for selection.

4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.

2. Sustainability design submittals and reports.

3. Certificates.

4. Test reports.

5. Inspection reports.

6. Manufacturer's instructions.

7. Manufacturer's field reports.

8. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals:

1. Project record documents.

2. Operation and maintenance data.

3. Warranties.

4. Bonds.

5. Other types as indicated.

D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.12 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.

B. Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 78 00.

C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.

1. After review, produce duplicates.

2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Requirements:

1. Use a single transmittal for related items.

2. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential numerical suffix.

3. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy.

4. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp will not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned.

5. Deliver each submittal on date noted in submittal schedule, unless an earlier date has been agreed to by all affected parties, and is of the benefit to the project. a. Send submittals in electronic format via email to Architect.

6. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. a. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
b. For sequential reviews involving Architect's consultants, Owner, or another affected party, allow an additional 7 days.
c. For sequential reviews involving approval from authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ), in addition to Architect's approval, allow an additional 30 days.

7. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.

8. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

9. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

10. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements.

11. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed, unless they are partial submittals for distinct portion(s) of the work, and have received prior approval for their use.

12. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

13. Submittals not requested will be recognized, and will be returned "Not Reviewed", B. Product Data Procedures:

1. Submit only information required by individual specification sections.

2. Collect required information into a single submittal.

3. Submit concurrently with related shop drawing submittal.

4. Do not submit (Material) Safety Data Sheets for materials or products.

5. Submit sustainable design reporting submittals under separate cover.

C. Shop Drawing Procedures:

1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting Contract Documents and coordinating related work.

2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents to create shop drawings.

3. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings.

D. Samples Procedures:

1. Transmit related items together as single package.

2. Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing installation locations.

3. Include with transmittal high-resolution image files of samples to facilitate electronic review and approval. Provide separate submittal page for each item image.

E. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

F. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

G. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

H. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

3.14 SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A. Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, and approve, or take other appropriate action.

B. Submittals for Information: Architect will acknowledge receipt and review. See below for actions to be taken.

C. Architect's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on electronic submittals.

1. Notations may be made directly on submitted items and/or listed on appended Submittal Review cover sheet.

D. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for review:

1. Authorizing purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and installation:
a. "Reviewed", or language with same legal meaning. b. "Make Corrections Noted, Resubmission not Required", or language with same legal meaning.
1) At Contractor's option, submit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated.
c. "Make Corrections Noted, Resubmit for Record", or language with same legal meaning.
1) Resubmit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated.

Resubmit separately, or as part of project record documents. 2) Non-responsive resubmittals may be rejected.

2. Not Authorizing fabrication, delivery, and installation:
a. "Revise and Resubmit".
1) Resubmit revised item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. 2) Non-responsive resubmittals may be rejected.
b. "Rejected".
1) Submit item complying with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for information:

1. Items for which no action was taken:
a. "Received" - to notify the Contractor that the submittal has been received for record only.

2. Items for which action was taken:
a. "Reviewed" - no further action is required from Contractor.

END OF SECTION 01 30 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Request for Interpretation Form 01 30 00.01 - 1
SECTION 013000.01

REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION
Project Name: Job No.:

RFI No:

To: Architect:

LPA, Inc.

Contractor:

Subject:

Specification Section Paragraph No. Drawing No. Detail No.

Category:
☐ Need for Clarification.
☐ Unforeseen Condition.
☐ Conflict Within Documents.
☐ Coordination Problem.
☐ Other.

Description:

Contractor’s Proposed Resolution:
☐ Attachments:
☐ Estimated Cost Impact” $ ☐ Estimated Time Impact:

Contactor Signature: Date:

Architect’s Response:

Refer to RFI procedures specified in Section 013100 – Project Management and Coordination. This RFI, when completed is not authorization for change to the Contract Documents. Changes to the Contract Documents are authorized only by properly LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Request for Interpretation Form 01 30 00.01 - 2
executed Construction Change Directives or Change Order. ☐ Attachments:

Architect’s Signature: Date:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Digital Data Request Form 01 30 00.02 - 1
SECTION 013000.02 – DIGITAL DATA REQUEST FORM
From (Requestor): DRC NO.: Date:

Project:

Project No:

Location:

Attn: Description:

Phone:

Fax:

Execution of this document will confirm your request for copies of digital files related to the above referenced project. Please complete the following section and return a signed copy of this form via fax or mail with payment to LPA.

DESCRIPTION OF DOCUMENTATION REQUESTED:

Type of Files Needed:

DWG (AutoCAD Native)
DWF (AutoCAD Design Web)
DXF (AutoCAD Drawing Exchange)
Purpose of Request:

If Requestor is a subcontractor to the Project’s General Contractor, please indicate the name and phone number of contact at General Contractor's office:

Name: Number:

If Requestor is a consultant to the project's owner, please indicate the name and phone number of contact at owner's office:

Name: Number:

LPA can only release electronic files to the Project's Owner, consultants to the Project's Owner and/or the Project's General Contractor. A written statement by the Project's General Contractor authorizing LPA to release documentation to a subcontractor of the General Contractor must accompany this request. Please be advised that, in case of existing construction, the documents requested are reproductions of documentation on file and do not necessarily represent as-built or existing conditions. LPA does not warrant in any way the accuracy of this information and shall not be responsible for any discrepancy between this documentation and the existing conditions. In the case of projects which are currently being designed and/or under construction, the electronic documentation are reproductions of the documentation on file and may be subject to change due to owner, field and/or coordination revisions. LPA shall not be responsible for reissuing files which may me revised after issuance of these requested files and shall not be responsible for advising other parties as to the status of document revisions. Also, please be advised that the requested documents are instruments of service and, as such, remain the property of LPA and/or the respective consultant. Any unauthorized re-use of these documents without the written authorization of LPA and/or consultant is strictly prohibited. Please note all disclaimers and warnings printed on electronic media labels. Electronic media may contain undetected viruses. It is always recommended that disks be checked prior to use. LPA assumes no liability or responsibility for damage to user's property as a result of using this request may include archive storage and retrieval, charges, reproduction and handling expenses, etc., which are estimated to be, but may exceed $0.00. The exact cost will be determined by LPA upon execution of this request confirmation The basic charge for copying/translating DWG (AUTOCAD), DWF or DXF files is $100 per drawing.

Payment of these costs must be made by the requestor to LPA, Inc. prior to release of the documents.

The requested files shall be provided at the direction of the Owner. No charge to Requestor.

By signing this Request, the Requestor agrees to the conditions for reimbursement to LPA, Inc. as stated above.

Authorized Signature: Date:

Please return one fully executed copy of this form to: LPA, Inc.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Digital Data Request Form 01 30 00.02 - 2
(Offices in Irvine, San Diego, San Jose, & Sacramento, CA and San Antonio, TX) LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Submittal Cover Sheet 01 30 00.03 - 1
SECTION 013000.03

SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET
Project Name:

LPA, Inc. Project No.:

Resubmittal Submittal No:
☐ Yes
Add “letter” to original number
SUBCONTRACTOR:

Name:

Address:

Phone:

Contact:

CONTRACTOR:

Name:

Signed:

Dates:

I hereby certify that I have reviewed the attached,
have verified requirements and compliance with the
Contract Documents.

Submittal Description: Specification Section:

Date Received From Contractor: Specification Section:

Consultant Review:
☐ Civil
☐ Electrical
☐ Mechanical
☐ Structural
☐ Other: _______________________________________
Date sent to consultant: __________________________
Date received from consultant: ____________________
Copies:
☐ Contractor
☐ Inspector
☐ LPA File
☐ Owner
☐ Other: _______________________________________
Review and commentary noted below are only for general conformance with (1) The design concept of the project and (2) The information given in the contract documents and for no other purpose. Commentary below is subject to the requirements of the contract documents. The contractor is not relieved from responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents, errors or omissions in drawings, calculations or samples, confirmation and correlation of dimensions at the job site, fabrication process and techniques of construction, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and satisfactory performance of his work.
☐ Reviewed
☐ Furnish as corrected
☐ Revise and Resubmit
☐ Contractor
☐ Inspector
Reviewed by: Date:

Remarks:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 1
SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittals.

B. Quality assurance.

C. Testing and inspection agencies and services.

D. Control of installation.

E. Mock-ups.

F. Manufacturers' field services.

G. Defect Assessment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 21 00 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IAS AC89 - Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010.

1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Contractor's Quality Control Plan: Contractor's management plan for executing the Contract for Construction.

B. Contractor's Professional Design Services: Design of some aspect or portion of the project by party other than the design professional of record. Provide these services as part of the Contract for Construction.

1. Design Services Types Required:
a. Construction-Related: Services Contractor needs to provide in order to carry out the Contractor’s sole responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures.
b. Design-Related: Design services explicitly required to be performed by another design professional due to highly-technical and/or specialized nature of a portion of the project. Services primarily involve engineering analysis, calculations, and design, and are not intended to alter the aesthetic aspects of the design.

C. Design Data: Design-related, signed and sealed drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, shop drawings and other submittals provided by Contractor, and prepared directly by, or under direct supervision of, appropriately licensed design professional.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor.

1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.

1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 2
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES
A. Owner will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform certain specified testing.

B. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.

C. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.

D. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Contractor Employed Agency:

1. Laboratory Qualifications: Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89.

2. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

2.02 MOCK-UPS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 3
A. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

2.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 01 40 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 01 56 39 - 1
SECTION 01 56 39

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tree protection of existing trees and plants
B. Tree pruning of existing trees

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Division 01 Section - Temporary Facilities and Controls B. Division 31 Section - Site Clearing
C. Division 32 Section - Landscape Work

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest diameters at 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch (100-mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch (100- mm) size.

B. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

C. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following:

1. Organic Mulch: 1-pint (0.5-L) 1-quart (1-L) volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch.

2. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components.

3. Protection-Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation.

C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

1. Species and size of tree.

2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each.

3. Reason for pruning.

4. Description of pruning to be performed.

5. Description of maintenance following pruning.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm.

E. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

F. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work.

G. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.

2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arborist Qualifications:

1. Certified Arborist as certified by ISA.

2. Licensed Arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 01 56 39 - 2
B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Enforcing requirements for protection zones.
c. Arborist's responsibilities.
d. Contractor responsibilities
e. Field quality control.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Foot traffic.

4. Erection of sheds or structures.

5. Impoundment of water.

6. Excavation or trenching or digging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

8. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.

9. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) Insert dimension in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials.

1. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches (100 mm) deep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2. Refer to Section 32 Landscape Work for material requirements.

B. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Wood and bark chips.

2. Size Range: 1-1/2" inch minimum, 3" maximum.

3. Color: Natural.

C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch (50-mm) opening, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails and 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.
a. Height: 6 feet (1.8 m).
b. Galvanized
c. Polymer-Coating Color: Black.

2. Gates: Single swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches (914 mm) .

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 01 56 39 - 3
D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes pre-punched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering and as follows:

1. Size: as required

2. Text: "TREE PROTECTION ZONE - KEEP OUT. No unauthorized entry. No storage of vehicles, materials, or debris. No dumping of chemicals, slurry, paint, oil, etc. "

3. Lettering: 3-inch (75-mm-)high minimum, black characters on white background.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

Flag - Tie a 1-inch (25-mm) blue-vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground.

B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

C. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated.

1. Apply 3-inch (76-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (152 mm) of tree trunks.

3.03 TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES
A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation.

1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.

3. Access Gates: Install as required; adjust to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. Install one sign spaced approximately every 35 feet (10.5 m) on protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction.

C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.

D. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

E. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site.

1. Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone.

2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted.

3.04 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only roots smaller than 2” in diameter that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.

C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning.

D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.

3.05 ROOT PRUNING
A. Do Not prune any roots without written authorization from Arborist or Client.

B. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows:

1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. Coat cut ends of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with emulsified asphalt or other coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues as approved by the arborist.

3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil.

4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.

5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Grading” C. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches (300 mm) outside of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation.

D. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

3.06 CROWN PRUNING
A. Do not prune any branches without written authorization from Arborist or Client.

B. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as follows:

1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist.

2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following:
a. Type of Pruning: Cleaning Thinning Raising Reduction.

3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

C. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site.

3.07 REGRADING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 01 56 39 - 5
A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated.

1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning.

C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 4 inches (50 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.

3.09 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.

2. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs.

3. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.

4. Perform repairs within 24 hours.

5. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.

B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 66 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 4 inches (100 mm) or smaller in caliper size.

2. Provide one new tree(s) of 6-inch (150-mm) caliper size for each tree being replaced that measure more than 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper size.
a. Species: Species selected by Architect.

3. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 32 Section "Landscape Work" C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction.

Aerate 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch (50-mm-) diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm) O.C. Backfill holes with an equal mix of native soil and sand.

3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 01 56 39
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 1
SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents.

B. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted:

1. Contain asbestos or lead-base paint:
a. No materials may be used in this project or in any tools, devices, clothing or equipment used to affect this construction that contain asebestos or lead-based paint.

All work or materials found to contain asbestos or lead-base paint, or material installed with asbestos containing equipment or lead-base paint will be immediately rejected and this work will be removed by a certified EPA hazard material Contractor under the supervision of a certified hazard material consultant at no additional cost to Owner.
b. Contractor and subcontractors shall certify that no asbestos containing materials and no lead-base paint were used in this project. Certification letter must be addressed to Owner, including project and Contractors’ information; to be notarized.

C. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:

1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 61 16.

2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 61 16.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS
A. See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.

B. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:

1. Will obtain necessary approval of agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Construction Document Revisions
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 2

1. Should a Contractor-proposed substitution or alternative sequence or method of construction require revision of the Contract Drawings or Specifications, including revisionsfor the purposes of determining feasibility, scope or cost, or revisions for the purpose ofobtaining review and approval by authorities having jurisdiction, revisions will be made byArchitect or other consultant of the District who is the responsible design professional, asapproved in advance by District's Representative.

2. Services of Architect, other responsible design professionals and District for researching and reporting on proposed substitutions or alternative sequence and method ofconstruction shall be paid by Contractor when such activities are considered additionalservices to the design services contracts of Architect or other responsible designprofessional with District.

3. Costs of services by Architect, other responsible design professionals and District shall be paid, including travel, reproduction, long distance telephone and shipping costsreimbursable at cost plus usual and customary mark-up for handling and billing. a. Such fees shall be paid whether or not the proposed substitution or alternative sequence or method of construction is ultimately accepted by District and a Change Order isexecuted.
b. Such fees shall be paid from Contractor's portion of savings, if a net reduction in Contract Sum results. If fees exceed Contractor's portion of net reduction, Contractor shall pay all remaining fees unless otherwise agreed in advance by District's Representative.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration.

B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging.

C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.

H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 74 19.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.

G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.

VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products.

B. Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products.

C. Requirement for installer certification that they did not use any non-compliant products.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of compliance.

C. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either 1) no adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been used in the installation of installer's products, or 2) that such products used comply with these requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner.

B. Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor.

END OF SECTION 01 61 16
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1
SECTION 01 70 00

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Cutting and patching.

C. Surveying for laying out the work.

D. Cleaning and protection.

E. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.

F. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties, and bonds.

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.

1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.

2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.

2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities,

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.

Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. Furnish information to local uitlity and Owner where necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utilities and appertenances.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.

C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect.

F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:

1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and ________.

2. Grid or axis for structures.

3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and ________.

H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3
I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.

2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.

3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.

4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.

5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.

6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.

7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

I. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.

3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 4
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.

3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.09 FINAL CLEANING
A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

E. Clean filters of operating equipment.

F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage systems, and ______.

G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

B. Substantial Completion

1. Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
b. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
c. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. d. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. e. Complete startup testing of systems.
f. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
g. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
h. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

2. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
a. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

3. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection.

4. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection.

C. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect.

D. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

3.11 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection.

B. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.

C. Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

D. Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected.

1. Following completion of all final inspection items, Contactor shall prepare and submit a final Certificate for Payment.

3.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.

B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION 01 70 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 19 - 1 SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.

D. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.

E. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:

1. Burning on the project site.

2. Burying on the project site.

3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.

4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

F. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.

B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.

J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.

L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water.

M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste.

N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.

P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use.

Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 19 - 2 B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.

1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment.

2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.

3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills.
c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators.
c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.

6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards.
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.

7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.

B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.

C. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.

D. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

2.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.

B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 19 - 3 C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.

1. Prebid meeting.

2. Preconstruction meeting.

3. Regular job-site meetings.

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.

1. Provide containers as required.

2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.

3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.

F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations.

G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.

END OF SECTION 01 74 19
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Closeout Submittals 01 78 00 - 1
SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project record documents.

B. Operation and maintenance data.

C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner and Architect for monthly review.

Monthly approval is a condition for monthly pay app approvals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

2. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

3. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following:

1. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Closeout Submittals 01 78 00 - 2
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.

2. Field changes of dimension and detail.

3. Details not on original Contract drawings.

2.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

2.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.

2.04 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.

B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system.

C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.

I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

2.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

END OF SECTION 01 78 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
LPA Notice of Completion Warranty Form (Public
Client) 01 78 00.01 - 1
SECTION 017800.01
WARRANTY/GUARANTEE FORM – NOTICE OF COMPLETION

FOR WORK
We, the undersigned, do hereby warranty and guaranty that the parts of the work described above which we have furnished or installed for:

Project Name: (Insert Project Name)
Owner: (Insert Owner’s Name)
Location: (Insert Project Location)
are in accordance with the Contract Documents and that all said work as installed will fulfill or exceed all the Warranty and Guaranty requirements. We agree to repair or replace work installed by us, together with any other work which is displaced or damaged by so doing that proves to be defective in workmanship, material, or operation within a period of:
(Insert Written Years) (Insert Arabic Numeral of Years) Years(s) from the date of filing of the Notice of Completion, ordinary wear and tear and unusual neglect or abuse excepted.

In the event of our failure to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within a reasonable time period determined by the Owner, after notification in writing, we, the undersigned, all collectively and separately, hereby authorize the Owner to have said defective work repaired and/or replaced and made good, and agree to pay to the Owner upon demand all monies that the owner may expend in making good said defective work, including all collection costs and reasonable attorney fees.

Date:
(Insert Name of Contractor) (Insert Name of Subcontractor, Sub-Subcontractor, Manufacturer or Supplier)
Signature: Signature:

Name: Name:

Title: Title:

State License No: State License No:

Local Representative: For Maintenance, Repair, or Replacement Service, Contact:

Name:

Address:

Phone Number:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Demonstration and Training 01 79 00 - 1
SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except:

1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority.

2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.

3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.

4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems.

1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.

2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 01 79 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
General Commissioning Requirements 01 91 13 - 1
SECTION 01 91 13

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning:

1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this.

2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with Contract Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this.

3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete:

Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Contractor are utilized to achieve this.

4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this.

B. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance manuals and project record documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of Owner.

B. Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply:

1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to accuracy of 0.5 degree F and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F.

2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year.

3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection.

C. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of Owner.

D. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment.

1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning Authority and will not become the property of Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Commissioning Authority has prepared the Commissioning Plan.

1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completing the commissioning plan.

2. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturer representatives.

B. Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan.

C. Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination requirements for all parties in the commissioning process.

D. Commissioning Schedule:

1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract.

2. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup.

3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems.

4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay.

3.02 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS
A. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup.

B. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity.

C. Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority.

3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned.

1. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed.

2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists, regardless of apparent redundancy.

3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms:
a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and operating and ready for Functional Testing.
b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, itemized by unit.
c. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as specified," "as submitted," and "as installed."
d. Serial number of installed unit.
e. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer’s start-up checklist items and minor testing.
f. Sensor and actuator calibration information.

B. Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required unless otherwise specified.

1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies.

2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of remaining items.

3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form.

4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form.

5. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at Contractor's option.

6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation.

7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion.

C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to Contractor.

1. Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so indicated in Contract Documents.

2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup checklists, and O&M data.

3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in Contract Documents or not.

4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner.

D. Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for:

1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan.

2. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan.

E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner.

1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning Authority immediately.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by the final test procedures.

B. Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout.

C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose.

D. Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner; if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction.

1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with Contract Documents or does not perform properly.

2. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor completes the form certifying that the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority; the Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re-test.

3. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items.

4. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing.

5. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re-tests.

E. Functional Test Procedures:

1. Some test procedures are included in Contract Documents; where Functional Test procedures are not included in Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor.

2. Examples of Functional Testing:
a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc.
c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional Testing.

F. Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing.

3.05 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
A. Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and pressure sensors and gauges, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated.

B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by Commissioning Authority and Owner beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results.

C. All Sensors:

1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation.

2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end.

3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F of each other, and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other.

4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.

D. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application:

1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor.

2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value.

3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor.

E. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application.

1. Disconnect sensor.

2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor.

3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control panel.

4. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature.

5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter.

6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the building automation system.

7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to comply with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction.

8. Reconnect sensor.

9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor.

10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value.

11. If not, replace sensor and repeat.

12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.

F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums:

1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design.

2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design.

3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F.

4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design.

5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg.

6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design.

7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design.

8. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F.

G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet.

H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:

1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout.

2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.

3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required.

4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required.

5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.

6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics).

I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils.

1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.

2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

3.06 TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

B. Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows, pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition.

C. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows:

1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only minor size or capacity difference.

2. Sampling is not allowed for:
a. Major equipment.
b. Life-safety-critical equipment.
c. Prefunctional Checklist execution.

3. XX = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample; defined for specific type of equipment.

4. YY = the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested; defined for specific type of equipment.

5. Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment, but not less than three units. This constitutes the "first sample."

6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining identical units.

7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units.

8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing.

D. Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the “observation”).

E. Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box.

F. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value.

G. Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation.

H. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect indicators.

I. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures:

1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor; at the Commissioning Authority’s request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge.

2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers.

3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring.

4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page.

5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it.

6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing.

3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional requirements.

B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to Owner.

C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner.

END OF SECTION 01 91 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 01 91 14 - 1
SECTION 01 91 14

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section covers the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities for commissioning:

2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with Contract Documents: Functional Tests performed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this.

3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete:

Detailed O&M data submittals are specified.

4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is specified.

B. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion.

C. Coordinate and direct all the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

D. The Commissioning Authority is to be employed by Construction Manager on behalf of Owner.

Contractor to coordinate with Owner for expenses required.

1.02 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING
A. The following are to be commissioned:

B. Building envelope.

1. Asbestos Abatement per Appendix A.

C. Fire Protection Systems:

1. Sprinkler System.

D. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as requiring commissioning.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 - The HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process; 2007, with Errata (2012).

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Commissioning Plan:

1. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect within 30 days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract.

2. Submit revised draft to be included in the construction Contract Documents, not less than 4 weeks 4 weeks prior to commencement of construction..

3. Submit final plan not more than 90 days after commencement of construction, for issuance to all parties.

B. List of Prefunctional Checklists to be developed:

1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later.

2. Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction Contract Documents.

3. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction.

C. Prefunctional Checklists:

1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later.

2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction Contract Documents.

3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned.

D. List of Functional Test procedures to be developed:

1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later.

2. Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in Contract Documents; this is intended to be a list of titles, not full description of the tests.

3. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction.

E. Functional Test Procedures:

1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later.

2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction Contract Documents.

3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned.

F. Training Plan.

G. Recommissioning Manual: Submit within 60 days after receipt of Owner's instructions to proceed with preparation.

H. Commissioning Process Record: Submit to Contractor for inclusion with O&M manuals.

Include, at a minimum the following:

I. Final Commissioning Report: Submit to Owner. Include the following:

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Prepare and implement the Commissioning Plan, covering commissioning schedule, Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test procedures, coordination requirements, and forms to be used, for all parties in the commissioning process.

1. Call and chair meetings of the Commissioning team when appropriate.

2. Give Contractor sufficient notice for scheduling commissioning activities.

3. Develop a comprehensive start-up and initial systems checkout plan with cooperation of Contractor and subcontractors.

4. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1 may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan.

5. Avoid replication of information included in the construction Contract Documents to the greatest extent possible.

B. Review the construction Contract Documents for Contractor submittals of draft checklists, draft test procedures, manufacturer startup procedures, and other information intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparing the Commissioning Plan.

C. Commissioning Schedule:

1. Coordinate with Contractor anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system.

2. Contractor's scheduling responsibilities are specified in the construction Contract Documents.

3. Revise and re-issue schedule monthly.

4. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems.

5. Deliver relevant Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures to Contractor in time to avoid delay.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. General Commissioning Specifications: Architect has prepared general commissioning specifications for inclusion in the construction Contract Documents; review and submit comments to Owner.

1. These specifications include:
a. Procedures applicable to all types of items to be commissioned.

2. Prepare specifications for any of the following that would be recommended, for incorporation into the construction Contract Documents by Architect:
a. Additional Contractor submittals needed for purposes of commissioning, such as startup procedures, draft test procedures, draft training plans, etc. b. Additional Owner personnel training.
c. Additional operation or maintenance data that should be submitted.

B. Prefunctional Checklists: Develop detailed Checklists for each item to be commissioned.

1. List of Checklists to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text.

2. The Checklist forms are intended to be part of the Contractor's Contract Documents.

C. Functional Testing: Develop detailed procedures for each item to be commissioned; submit for review by Owner and Architect.

1. List of Test Procedures to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text.

2. The forms the Commissioning Authority will use to report Functional Test results are not intended to be part of Contractor's Contract Documents, but the Functional Test Procedures that must be executed by the Contractor must be made part of the Contract Documents, by modification if necessary.

D. Develop any other reporting forms Contractor will be required to use; if they are likely to require a substantially different amount of work than the Contractor can reasonably anticipate, they must be included in the construction Contract Documents.

E. If any part of the documents described above have not been developed by the bid date, coordinate with Architect the issuance of modifications to the construction Contract Documents

2.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. Prefunctional Checklists - Format:

1. Provide a cover sheet showing name of equipment item or system, documentation identification number (see Documentation Identification Scheme), names of accessory components involved, and identification of related checklists.

2. Include on cover sheet space for Contractor's use in attesting to completeness; provide spaces for the signatures of the general contractor and each subcontractor or other entity responsible, customized to the project and the type of item.

3. Include on the cover sheet, above the signature block, the following statement: "The work referenced in this Checklist and other work integral to or dependent on this work is complete and ready for functional testing. The checklist items are complete and have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event." Include two checkboxes:
a. "This Checklist is submitted for approval with no exceptions." b. "This Checklist is submitted for approval, subject to the attached list of outstanding items, none of which preclude the performance of safe and reliable functional tests. A statement of completion will be submitted upon completion of the outstanding items."

4. Use a consistent, tabular format for all Checklists, with one line per checklist activity.

5. For each line item, provide space for initials and date, and identification of the subcontractor or other entity responsible.

2.04 FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 01 91 14 - 4
A. Functional Test Forms: Prepare and distribute forms in advance of testing. Use a consistent format to the greatest degree practicable. For each form, include the following:

1. Signature Block: Signature of the designated commissioning lead and the system and equipment installer attesting that the recorded test results are accurate.

2.05 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
A. Coordinate the commissioning work with Contractor and Construction Manager; ensure that commissioning activities are being incorporated into the master schedule.

B. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review Contractor's meeting minutes for issues relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving discrepancies.

C. Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting: Plan and conduct a meeting early in the construction phase to review proposed commissioning schedule, activities, and responsibilities with parties involved. Require attendance by every member of the Commissioning Team.

D. Conduct periodic meetings as necessary to coordinate, resolve planning issues, and aid in resolution of deficiencies, minimizing the time spent by Contractor and Owner personnel; hold meetings at least monthly.

E. Submit periodic progress reports to Owner and Contractor.

F. Review Contractor shop drawing submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs; verify that Owner's responsibilities are clearly defined in warranties.

G. Review and approve submittals directly related to commissioning.

H. Deliver Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures to Contractor.

I. Verify satisfactory completion of Prefunctional Checklists by Contractor by reviewing checklists and by site observation and spot checking; provide formal approval when satisfactory.

J. Verify startup of all systems by reviewing start-up reports and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory.

K. Coordinate, witness and approve Functional Tests performed by Contractor. Coordinate retesting until satisfactory performance is achieved.

L. HVAC Commissioning:

1. Gather and review the control sequences and interlocks and work with Contractor and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to prepare detailed Functional Test procedures.

2. Witness all or part of HVAC piping test and flushing procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals.

3. Witness all or part of duct testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals.

4. Review TAB Plan prepared by Contractor.

5. Before TAB is executed, witness sufficient Functional Testing of the control system to approve it to be used for TAB.

6. Verify air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports, and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory.

7. Analyze trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

M. Witness and document testing of systems and components over which the Commissioning Authority does not have direct control, such as smoke control systems, tests contracted directly by Owner, and tests by manufacturer’s personnel; include documentation in O&M manuals.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 01 91 14 - 5
N. When Functional Testing for specific systems or equipment is specified to be performed by the Commissioning Authority rather than the Contractor, perform such testing without assistance of Contractor.

O. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide written progress and test reports with recommended actions.

P. Operation and Maintenance Data: Review submitted operation and maintenance data for completeness; provide formal approval if satisfactory.

Q. Notify Contractor and Owner of deficiencies in procedures or results; suggest solutions.

2.06 TRAINING
A. Training Plan: Prepare a comprehensive Training Plan, incorporating draft training plans submitted by Contractor.

1. Include a ____ hour session by the HVAC design engineer covering the overall HVAC system and equipment design concepts, with one-line schematic drawings.

2. Include a ____ hour session by the Commissioning Authority on the use of the blank Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test forms for re-commissioning purposes.

3. Establish criteria for determining satisfactory completion of training.

B. Verify that training was satisfactorily completed; provide formal approval if satisfactory.

2.07 CLOSEOUT
A. Commissioning Record: Use the same format and organization as specified for the O&M manuals.

1. Include the Final Commissioning Plan and Final Report.

2. For each product or system and equipment item, include the following organized as indicated, with separator tabs:
a. Design intent documentation, furnished by Architect or others. b. Detailed operational sequences.
c. Startup plan and approved startup reports.
d. Filled out Prefunctional Checklists.
e. Filled out Functional Test reports; trend logs and monitoring reports and analysis; other verification documentation.
f. Training plan and training records.
g. Recommissioning recommendations, including time schedule and procedures; include blank copies of all Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms.

B. Final Commissioning Report: Include:

1. Executive summary.

2. List of participants and roles.

3. Brief facility description.

4. Overview of commissioning scope and general description of testing and verification methods.

5. For each item commissioned, an evaluation of adequacy of:
a. The product itself; i.e. compliance with Contract Documents. b. Installation.
c. Functional performance; include a brief description of the verification method used and observations and conclusions from the testing.
d. O&M documentation, including design intent.
e. Operator training.

6. List of all outstanding non-compliance items, referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc., where the deficiency is documented.

7. List of unresolved issues, seasonal or deferred testing, and other concerns that could affect facility operation.

8. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. (about four to six pages).

9. Attach appendices containing all commissioning documentation, including logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, etc., except that specified to be part of the Commissioning Record.

C. Recommissioning Manual: Revise the Commissioning Plan documents, checklists, and Functional Test forms as necessary based on accepted recommendations of the final Commissioning Report. Provide step-by-step instructions for recommissioning, blank forms, and cross-references to O&M data needed during recommissioning.

2.08 POST-OCCUPANCY PHASE
A. Coordinate deferred and seasonal Functional Tests; verify correction of deficiencies.

B. On-Site Review: 10 months after Substantial Completion conduct on-site review with Owner's staff.

1. Review the current facility operation and condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning.

2. Interview staff to identify problems or concerns they have operating the facility as originally intended.

3. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals.

4. Identify areas of concern that are still under warranty or are the responsibility of the original construction contractor.

5. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems.

END OF SECTION 01 91 14
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Demolition 02 41 00 - 1
SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building demolition .

B. Selective demolition of built site elements.

C. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements.

C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

D. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.

F. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Vegetation and existing debris removal.

G. Section 31 22 00 - Grading: Topsoil removal.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2022, with Errata (2021).

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Site Plan: Showing:

1. Areas for temporary construction and field offices.

C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.

1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences.

2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 31 23 23 - Fill.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SCOPE
A. Remove the entire Building B per demolition drawings.. And partial demolition in Building A per demolition drawings.

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public.

1. Obtain required permits.

2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants.

5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.

6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

1. Provide bracing and shoring.

2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.

3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.

D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner.

E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.

F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on existing record documents only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.

2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.

B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

C. Protect existing work to remain.

1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.

2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.

3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION 02 41 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Maintenance of Concrete 03 01 00 - 1
SECTION 03 01 00

MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks.

B. Repair of deteriorated concrete.

C. Scope of Work: As indicated on drawings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating, troweling, and similar operations; curing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2019.

B. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2022.

C. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2023.

D. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2022.

E. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2018.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate product standards, physical and chemical characteristics, technical specifications, limitations, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations regarding each material.

C. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of structural reinforcement repairs and type of repair.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CEMENTITIOUS PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:

1. W. R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 CLEANING EXISTING CONCRETE
A. Provide enclosures, barricades, and other temporary construction as required to protect adjacent work from damage.

B. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective.

1. Try the gentlest method first, then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage.

2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods.

3.03 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR USING CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS A. Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using method(s) specified above and allow to dry.

END OF SECTION 03 01 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 1
SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.

B. Openings for other work.

C. Form accessories.

D. Form stripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The applicable version of the standards listed below shall be per Chapter 35 of Part 2 of the 2022 edition of the California Building Code (CBC), including addendums and errata. Where the standard is not listed in the CBC, then the most current version of the standard shall be used or as referenced by other standards.

1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 303R – Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete for Buildings.

4. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

5. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

6. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

7. ASTM D1621 – Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

8. ASTM D1622 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics

9. ASTM D6817/D6817M – Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam

10. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard:
a. PS 1 - Structural Plywood.

11. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB):
a. Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17

12. United States Green Building Council (USGBC):
a. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED):
b. Green Building Rating System.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.

1. Indicate location of form ties on exposed concrete walls.

2. Include locations and placement of steel embeds.

3. Indicate proposed locations of constructions joint.

D. Shoring and Reshoring:

1. Submit for records proposed design of shoring, schedule and sequencing of shoring installation and removal, and installing and removing reshoring.

E. Designer's Qualification Statement.

F. Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 2
A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Civil or Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Neither the Architect nor the Architect's consultants have been retained to design formwork, nor to determine the means and methods by which such operations are accomplished.

C. Prior to erecting formwork, coordinate locations of plumbing, mechanical, and electrical blockouts in concrete slabs.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.

B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.

C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in- place concrete work.

B. Design and construct concrete forms that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

C. Limit deflections to 1/8" between supports after placement of concrete.

D. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.

E. Formwork design shall comply with ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

1. Design shall be based on calculations prepared by a licensed engineer in California.

F. Erect formwork in a manner that will ensure the safety of construction personnel and the public.

2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Plywood: PS 1, Grade B-B, Class I.

1. Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges.

B. Lumber: Douglas species; structural grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.

2.03 METAL FORM MATERIALS
A. Metal: Min 16 ga sheet steel, tight fiitting, and stiffened to support weight of concrete such that tolerances are maintained.

B. Metal Deck Forms: Metal deck as specified in Contract Drawings.

2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type, galvanized metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, fixed length, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.

1. Ties should leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to exposed concrete surface.

2. Ties shall be designed to resist lateral pressure of concrete on forms and prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.

1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based compound.

2. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.

3. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Bio Strip WB (water-based): www.specchemllc.com/#sle. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Duogard: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 3
C. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve and nailable plastic base for smooth, round, steel load-transfer dowels.

D. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic or wood type; size per contract drawings; maximum possible lengths.

E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.
F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

G. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.

3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Earth Forms may be used if compacted fill or natural soil can be accurately cut and maintained.

B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.

3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.

C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.

F. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing.

G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork.

H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.

3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or other means of protection against rusting to steel forms.

1. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable for use.

C. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.

Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 4
E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.

F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

3.06 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

C. Do not reuse formwork without Architect's approval. When approved, do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork.

1. Reused formwork shall meet appearance requirements of new formwork.

2. Reused formwork shall be free of splaying, fraying, delamination or other damage.

3. Follow all requirements as for new formwork.

3.09 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 72 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

C. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements may not be removed until concrete has attained 28-day minimum design compressive strength, but in no case less than 21 days for standard reinforced concrete and 7 days for post-tensioned concrete. Determine potential compressive strength of in- place concrete by testing representative field-cured concrete specimens of concrete in question.

D. Form facing material may be removed 7 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

E. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

F. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms.

G. If accelerated form removal is desired, submit methods to Architect for review. Review by Architect does not alleviate contractor of responsibility for means and methods of construction and protection of structure during construction.

H. Reshore members as required in section below.

3.10 RESHORING
A. Shoring and reshoring shall conform to the requirements of ACI 347.

B. Extend shoring and reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 5
C. Plan and sequence removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

D. Shores shall not be removed prior to concrete achieving 28 day strengths.

E. While reshoring operations are under way, no construction ldoads shall be permitted on the new construction.

END OF SECTION 03 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.

B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.

C. Reinforcing steel for masonry work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.

1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Concrete Construction.

2. ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

4. ACI MNL-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.

5. ASTM A184/A184M - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.

6. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

7. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

8. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement.

9. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

10. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination

11. AWS A5.1 – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding

12. AWS A5.5 – Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding

13. AWS D1.1/D1.1M – Structural Welding Code – Steel.

14. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Steel Reinforcing Bars.

15. AWS D1.8/D1.8M - Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement.

16. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.

17. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CBSC, Title 24, Part 2- California Building Code (CBC), 2022 edition. a. Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections b. Chapter 19 - Concrete
C. US Army Corps of Engineers (USACE)

1. CW03210: Civil Works Construction Guide Specifications for Steel Bars, Welded Wire Fabric and Accessories for Concrete Reinforcement
D. United States Green Building Council (USGBC):

1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED):

2. Green Building Rating System.

1.04 GENERAL
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 2
A. Coordination: Refer to Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal regarding procedures for implementing construction waste management requirements.

B. Coordination: Coordinate Work specified in this Section with other Sections which require placement of embedded products and provision of openings and recesses. If formwork is placed after reinforcing, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcing, request instructions from Architect (Structural Engineer) before proceeding.

C. Refer to Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for RFI requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Reinforcing Shop Drawings:

1. Prepare Shop Drawings in accordance with the applicable requirements of {RS#10003516} and the CRSI Manual.

2. Provided scaled, dimensioned reinforcing plans for each floor level indicating size and spacing of reinforcing. Coordinate additional bars with locations of slab openings, penetrations, depressions and steps. Shop drawing shall be coordinated with concrete shop drawings. Ensure penetrations from affected trades for utilites are coordinated.

3. Provide scaled, dimensioned reinforcing elevations for each wall line indicating size and spacing of reinforcing. Coordinate additional bars with locations of openings, penetrations, and recesses. Shop drawing shall be coordinated with concrete shop drawings. Ensure penetrations from affected trades for utilites are coordinated.

4. Indicate welds in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M and AWS A2.4.

5. Indicate type of corrosion resistant reinforcing proposed and locations, if applicable.

6. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.

C. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports confirming physical characteristics of materials used in the performance of the work of this Section.

1. Where reinforcing is subject to welding, submit carbon equivalent determination reports in accordance with requirements of Source Quality Control.

D. Certificates: Submit copies of steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile, and bend tests for reinforcing steel. Transmit copy to installer for welded splices.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Materials & Resources Submittals: Refer to Section 018113 for additional information on LEED Submittals.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 301, CRSI and CBC Chapter 19.

B. Fabricator's Qualifications:

1. When required, show evidence of approval by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Welding of reinforcing shall be in conformance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWS D1.4/D1.4M, AWS D1.8/D1.8M and CBC Chapter 19.

D. Qualification of Welds, Welding operators, and welders:

1. Comply with applicable building code standard. Perform welding procedure qualification, except for prequalified procedures, as required by AWS D1.4/D1.4M, prior to executing any welding of reinforcing steel.

2. Only AWS Certified Welding Inspectors shall be used for tests and qualifications associated with welding of reinforcing steel.

3. Only AWS qualified welders or welding operators shall perform welding of reinfocing steel.

4. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months and in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 3
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Deliver reinforcing materials bundled and with identifying labels or tags affixed and legible.

1. Bundle reinforcing, tag with identification, and transport and store so as not to damage any material. Use metal tags indicating size, length and other marking shown on placement drawings. Maintain tags after bundles are broken.

B. The Inspector and/or Architect reserves the right to observe deliveries, to review bills of lading, and to reject the following:

1. Reinforcing not accompanied by required mill certificates.

2. Reinforcing exhibiting rusting or other contamination which might prohibit or inhibit bonding of concrete.

C. Store materials off ground and under cover.

1. Store reinforcement to avoid excessive rusting or fouling with grease, oil, dirt or other bond-weakening contaminants.

2. Store welding electrodes in accordance with AWS standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide deformed-type reinforcing conforming to ASTM Standards and material Grades as noted on Structural Contract Drawings.

1. When welding is indicated, provide reinforcing conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 706, Grade 60.

B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Plain type; ASTM A1064/A1064M.

1. Form: Flat Sheets.

2. WWR Style: As indicated on drawings.

C. Reinforcement Accessories:

1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch, conforming to ASTM A1064/A1064M , Grade 60.

2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement.

3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.

2.02 MECHANICAL REBAR SPLICING:

A. Coupler Systems: For use where indicated on drawings, mechanical devices for splicing reinforcing bars; designed to develop minimum 1.25Fy or Fu of the reinforcing bars in both tension and compression, conforming to ACI 318 Type II coupler. Splicing system shall be listed by the International Code Council (ICC) or by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Evaluation Service (IAPMO-ES)

1. Mechanically Locked Sleeves: Steel sleeves with internal gripping rails and external shear bolts, designed to positively engage the unaltered ends of butted reinforcing bars. a. Products: Dayton Superior “Bar-Lock" System.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Dowel Bar Splicers: Integral forged bar end, female-threaded, with nailing flange on one bar and integral matching male threads on the other bar. Provide specially forged bar ends, such that the cut male threads do not diminish the original bar cross section dimension.
a. Products: Dayton Superior; "DBDI" System.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.03 FABRICATION
A. Do not fabricate reinforcing until shop drawings have been reviewed by Architect.

B. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI MNL-66: Detailing Manual, ACI 318, and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 4
C. In case of fabrication errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcing in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.

D. Do not heat reinforcing to faciliate bending.

E. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only where shown on drawings using ASTM A706 reinforcing. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.

1. Protect joints from drafts during cooling process. Accelerated cooling is prohibited.

2. Do not tack weld reinforcing.

3. Fusion welding is not permitted unless approved by Engineer of Record.

F. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.

G. Comply with tolerances per ACI 117 and CRSI Manual.

H. Reinforcing with any of the following defects will not be permitted:

1. Lengths, depths, and bends not conforming to the spcified fabrication tolerances.

2. Bends or kinks not indicated in the drawings.

3. Reinforcing with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Materials for which physical characteristics have been stipulated shall have had such characteristics independently confirmed by laboratory tests employing industry recognized procedures.

B. Reinforcing to be welded:

1. Submit a copy of the mill test report to the Architect prior to placement of reinforcing steel in concrete members.

2. If mill test reports are not available, perform a chemical analysis of reinforcing representative of the reinforcing to be welded. The carbon equivalent (CE) shall not exceed 0.55.

3. Special inspection is required for welding of steel reinforcing.

C. Source Quality Control: Testing Laboratory shall test samples of reinforcing, ties, and stirrups from the material at the site or from place of distribution. Each sampling shall include at least two 18-inch long pieces. Perform the following tests according to ASTM A615:

1. Identified Reinforcing: Samples shall be obtained from bundles delivered from the mill, identified by heat number and accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports.

Reinforcing shall be properly tagged with Identification Certificate so as to be readily identified. Then perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of reinforcing per CBC Section 1909.2.4. Submit mill reports when samples are selected.

2. Unidentified reinforcing is not permitted.

3. Refer to Section 014500 for general requirements and "Quality Assurance" in Part 1 for specific procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean reinforcing to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which might reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

3.02 PLACEMENT
A. General: Comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars, 10th edition, for details and methods of placing reinforcing and supports.

1. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete reinforcing. If damage occurs, repair vapor barrier before placing concrete.
a. Provide for movement which equals joint width plus 1/2-inch.

2. Expansion Joints in Slab-on-grade: Interrupt reinforcing at expansion joints. Provide No. 5 by 24-inch long dowelled joints at 18 inches on centers with one end of dowel set in capped dowel sleeve.

3. Construction Joints: Allow reinforcing to run through without interruption, unless otherwise noted on Contract Structural Drawings.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 5
B. Support: Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displacement by formwork, construction or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required and as indicated on Contract Drawings.

1. Provide sufficient numbers and sizes of supports to carry reinforcing. a. Do not place reinforcing more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous reinforcing support.
b. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
c. Provide additional reinforcing for support where required to support reinforcing shown on Contract Drawings.

2. Repair and resupport reinforcing which may have moved during concrete placement operations.

C. Securing in Place:

1. Accurately place reinforcing and wire tie in precise position where reinforcing cross. Bend ends of wire ties away from the forms. Wire tie reinforcing to corners of ties and stirrups.

2. Support reinforcing according to the current edition of CSRI Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Supports using approved accessories and chairs.

3. Place precast concrete cubes with embedded wire ties to support reinforcing steel in concrete placed on grade and in footings. Precast concrete cubes are not acceptable in elevated concrete slabs, beams, or concrete filled metal deck.

4. Use care not to damage vapor barriers where they occur.

5. Dowel Bar Couplers:
a. Attach flanged, internally threaded end of dowel bar coupler to inside of formwork, using nails or screws.

D. Coverage: Place reinforcing to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 20.5.1.3, or as indicated on Contract Structural Drawings.

Securely tie reinforcing and related supports together with tie wire to hold reinforcing accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Place wire ties so that twisted ends are directly away from exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Clearance Between Reinforcing: Per ACI 318 and as indicated on Contract Drawings.

F. Splicing:

1. Provide standard reinforcing splices by lapping ends and tying securely with tie wire.

Comply with details indicated on Contract Structural Drawings. a. Unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings, comply with requirements of ACI 318 for minimum lap of Class B spliced reinforcing, including ACI 318 as amended by CBC.

2. Provide 1-1/2-inch minimum clearance between sets of splices. Stagger horizontal reinforcing so that adjacent splices are greater than 4 feet apart, unless noted otherwise on Structural Contract Drawings.

3. Field Welding: Comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4 where field welding is required.

Prior to field welding, determine the weldability of reinforcing in accordance with section "Source Quality Control" in Part 2. Only steel conforming to the chemical requirements of AWS D1.4 may be welded.

4. Splices: Do not splice reinforcing at the points of maximum stress except where indicated.

Lap splices as shown or required to develop the full strength of reinforcing. Stagger splices in horizontal wall reinforcing at least 24" longitudinally in alternate reinforcing and opposite faces.

5. Mechanical Couplers:
a. Mechanically Locked Sleeves:
1) During installation, ensure no damage or misalignment occurs to gripping rails; discard sleeve if damage occurs.
2) Insert first reinforcing bar completely, until it contacts internal divider. 3) Holding bar in position, hand-tighten all bolts.
4) Repeat above procedure for second bar.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 6
5) In random, alternating order, tighten all bolts to 50% of the specified torque. 6) In random, alternating order, tighten all bolts to 75% of the specified torque 7) In random, alternating order, drive each bolt until head shears off. b. Dowel Bar Couplers:
1) Splice open end of dowel bar to internal reinforcing steel. 2) After concrete has set up, thread externally threaded dowel bar into internally threaded dowel bar; hand tighten.
3) Then, attempt to rotate coupler further 1/4 turn by hand-tightening. 4) Splice open end of dowel bar to internal reinforcing steel.

G. Wire Fabric: Install welded wire fabric in longest lengths practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least 12 inches minimum, and lace splices with tie wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.

1. Extend fabric to within 1 inch of edge at slabs.

H. Slab on Grade Reinforcing: Do not displace or damage vapor retarder at slab on grade.

I. Dowels: Secure tie dowels in place before depositing concrete. Provide No. 3 reinforcing for securing dowels where no other reinforcing is provided
J. Maintaining Reinforcing in Position: Provide adequate means to ensure that reinforcing position and spacing is maintained during placement of concrete.

K. Adjustment and Inspection: Do not bend or straighten reinforcing in a manner injurious to material. Do not use reinforcing with kinks or bends not shown on Drawings and reviewed shop drawings or reinforcing with reduced cross-section due to corrosion or other cause.

L. Tolerances: Placement tolerances shall conform to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and ACI 117.

3.03 MASONRY REINFORCING
A. Refer to section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry for installation of masonry reinforcing.

B. Splice reinforcing in masonry with laps as indicated on Contract Drawings.

C. Position vertical reinforcing in masonry walls and tie in position top and bottom, and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

D. Provide dowels between footings and walls of the same grade, size, and spacing as vertical wall reinforcing, unless noted otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.

B. Inspection and Tests of Welds: Provide special inspection of shop and field welding in accordance with CBC Section 1704, 1705, 1903, and Structural Contract Drawings.

1. Tests will be made by testing laboratory for reinforcing welds, as follows:
a. Qualification of welders engaged in electric-arc welding of reinforcing. b. Verification of location of reinforcing for accuracy. c. Inspection of reinforcing welds by certified welding inspectors. d. X-ray test of one of the first three arc-welds made by each welder.

2. Tensile tests of sample welds of the largest size reinforcing for each type of welding.

3. When welds are judged to be deficient, provide and pay for such additional X-rays and tests as directed by the Architect. Defective welds shall be repaired, replaced, and retested.

C. Placing: Provide special inspection as required by CBC 1705.

1. Placement of Grade 60 or higher reinforcing steel for concrete above grade requires special inspection.

2. Schedule inspecting of reinforcing steel for conduit, sleeves, and embedded items to allow for correction, if necessary, before placement of overlying grids on reinforcing steel.

3.05 ADJUSTING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 7
A. Defective Reinforcing Work: The following shall be considered defective and may be ordered removed and reconstructed at no change in Contract Time or Contract Sum:

1. Reinforcing with kinks or bends not shown on Contract Drawings.

2. Reinforcing injured due to bending or straightening.

3. Reinforcing heated or bent.

4. Reinforcing not placed in accordance with Contract Documents.

5. Reinforcing that is rusty or oily.

6. Reinforcing exposed in surface of concrete
END OF SECTION 03 20 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete building frame members.

B. Concrete for composite floor construction.

C. Floors and slabs on grade.

D. Concrete foundation walls.

E. Concrete foundations.

F. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

G. Site Concrete Elements, including, but not limited to freestanding walls and their foundations, retaining walls and their foundations, light pole bases and their foundations, and flagpole bases and their foundations.

H. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads and equipment pits.

I. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.

B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.

D. Section 32 33 53 - Architectural Site Concrete for additional requirements for retaining walls and other site concrete.

1. ACI 117 - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High Density-Concrete - Guide.

3. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete.

4. ACI 301 - Specifications for Concrete Construction.

5. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

6. ACI 303R – Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete Practice

7. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.

8. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting.

9. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.

10. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete.

11. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

12. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

13. ACI 360R – Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground

14. ACI 503.4 – Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars

15. ACI MNL-15 – Field Reference Manual

16. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

17. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

18. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

19. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

20. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

21. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50 mm] Cube Specimens).

22. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.

23. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

24. ASTM C157/C157M - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic- Cement Mortar and Concrete.

25. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

26. ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

27. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.

28. ASTM C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

29. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

30. ASTM C289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).

31. ASTM C295/C295M - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete.

32. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

33. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.

34. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

35. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.

36. ASTM C595/C595M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.

37. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

38. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing.

39. ASTM C755 - Standard Practice for Selection of Water Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

40. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.

41. ASTM C989/C989M - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars.

42. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete.

43. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

44. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.

45. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.

46. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.

47. ASTM D1709 - Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free- Falling Dart Method.

48. ASTM D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

49. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.

50. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.

51. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers.

52. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

53. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

54. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

55. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

56. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

57. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CBSC, Title 24, Part 2- California Building Code (CBC), 2022 edition. a. Chapter 11b - Accessibility to Public Buildings, Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings, and Public Housing:
1) Division 3 - Building Blocks.
(a) Section 11B-302 - Floor or Ground Surfaces.
2) Division 4 - Accessible Routes.
(a) Section 11B-403 - Walking Surfaces.
b. Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections.
c. Chapter 19 - Concrete.

2. CBSC, Title 24, Part 11 - California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen), 2022 edition.

C. US Army Corps of Engineers (USACE)

1. COE CRD-C 513 - Handbook for Concrete and Cement Corps of Engineers Specifications for Rubber Waterstops 1974.

D. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC ES), a subsidiary corporation of the International Code Council:

1. ICC ES Evaluation Reports (ESR) for Materials, Products, Methods, and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

E. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. IAPMO Uniform Evaluation Service (UES) Report for Materials, Products, Methods, and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

F. Public Works Standards, Inc. (PWS):

1. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (Greenbook), latest edition with amendments, published by BNi Building News.

G. United States Green Building Council (USGBC):

1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED):

2. Green Building Rating System.

1.04 GENERAL
A. Identify finish flooring manufacturers' concrete slab vapor emission and alkalinity requirements and coordinate concrete slab mixing and installation procedures to achieve desired results.

Concrete slab requirements for finish flooring may be more restrictive than general requirements of the Contract Documents, and may require additional materials, means, or methods. Additional materials, means, or methods shall be included as part of the work.

B. Coordinate method of securing reinforcing and other embedded items in concrete slabs on grade without penetrating vapor barriers.

C. Verify depth of slab depressions for waterproofing and toppings at walking decks.

D. Verify depth of slab depression for frame and pan of entrance floor grilles. Coordinate leveling of floor with floor leveling compound and embedment of frame.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions, along with agency approvals (ICC, IAPMO, etc.) where applicable.

C. Embodied Carbon Footprint Submittals

1. Plant specific Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for each concrete mixture proposed for the project accompanying each concrete mixture submittal.

2. A calculation showing that the Global Warming Potential (GWP) of all the concrete supplied for the project shall be lower than the GWP target set in Section 2.

D. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design for approval.

1. Submit design mix data for each type of concrete and each compressive strength required on the Contract Drawings. Submittal of mix designs shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility to furnish concrete of proper consistency and specified strengths. Where used for concrete subject to special inspections, submit mix designs to testing laboratory for review and written acceptance.
a. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 and ACI 318 26.4.3.
b. Design mix submittal shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of California.
c. For each material, including admixtures and water, state water-cement ratio and maximum allowable water content.
d. For each material, state manufacturer's name, designation, and source. e. Submit shrinkage and creep factors for each type of aggregate, and each source proposed for use, for acceptance-review.
f. For each mix design:
1) Pay costs associated with mix design preparation.
2) Consider concrete cover and clear distances between reinforcing bars as indicated on the Contract Drawings in determining the aggregate size for mix designs. This may result in an aggregate size smaller than specified elsewhere in this Specification.
3) Submit a schedule which identifies the locations within the structure where each mix design is proposed for use.
4) Submit project specific 28-day shrinkage test results in accordance with shrinkage test requirements in Part 2 "CONCRETE MIX DESIGN." 5) Indicate proposed mix design complies with fiber reinforcing manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Shop Drawings. Concrete shop drawings shall be coordinated with shop drawings requirements for reinforcement and formwork. Submit the following items for review:

1. Layout drawings showing locations of slab-on-grade joints.

2. Scaled, dimensioned plans for each floor level indicating size and location of slab openings, penetrations, depressions, and steps. Shop drawing shall be coordinated with reinforcing shop drawings. Ensure penetrations from affected trades for utilities are coordinated.
a. Provided review stamp, with signature and date, of each trade proposed to work within the opening or penetration.

3. Proposed Construction Joints.

4. Scaled, dimensioned concrete elevations for each wall line indicating size and location of openings, penetrations, and recesses. Shop drawing shall be coordinated with reinforcing shop drawings. Ensure penetrations from affected trades for utilities are coordinated. a. Provided review stamp, with signature and date, of each trade proposed to work within the opening or penetration.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 5
F. Concrete Placement Schedule: Submit the proposed concrete placement schedule to the Architect for review prior to start of concrete placement.

G. Samples:

1. Pigment Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's complete sample chip set, including pigment number and required dosage rate for each color.

2. Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.

3. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of waterstops and construction joint devices.

4. Aggregate proposed for exposed finish, indicating color, texture, and size, for acceptance- review. Submit not less than 1 pound of aggregate.

H. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.

1. Submit certified laboratory test reports to Architect and, when applicable, the Building Department, confirming physical characteristics of materials used.

2. Shrinkage and petrographic tests on concrete with the proposed aggregate.

I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Aggregates and sand.

3. Admixtures.

4. Fiber reinforcement.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Floor and slab treatments.

7. Bonding agents.

8. Adhesives.

9. Vapor retarders.

10. Semi-rigid joint filler.

11. Joint-filler strips.

12. Repair materials.

J. Project Record Documents:

1. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

2. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

3. Concrete Placement: Date and time of each placement as provided in the placement schedule. Include start and end times, temperatures, humidities, and wind velocities.

4. Test Cylinders: Cross-reference to placement record entries

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with CBC Chapter 19.

1. Chemical products field-applied to concrete shall comply with the air quality requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

E. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on the Project personnel qualified as an ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

F. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer shall be certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." The certificate shall indicate that the plant has automatic batching and recording capabilities such that requirements of CBC 1705.3.3.1 are met.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. As applicable to the Work, review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures and concrete protection.

J. Mock-up

1. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special treatment or finish as result of formwork.
a. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.

2. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock- up exposed to view for duration of concrete work.

3. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

C. Warrant concrete floor sealer to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of 15 years.

Applications completed by an approved installer in accordance with published technical data will be warranted for the suppression and control of water vapor emission, alkalinity, and relative humidity from concrete during the warranty period.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C595/C595M for packaging and marking for cement delivery.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 7
A. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 318 for interpreting design requirements of reinforced concrete.

1. Contractor shall keep a copy of ACI Field Reference Manual MNL-15(16) in the field office.

B. Comply with, regulations of the air quality management district in force at the time of the performance of the work of this Section regarding sealers and curing compounds.

C. Finish concrete surfaces shall be stable, firm, and in compliance with CBC Section 11B-403 requirements for slip resistance.

1. Concrete paving shall have a minimum slip resistance coefficient of friction of 0.6 as tested in accordance with ASTM D2047.

2. Refer to Part 3 for non-slip finish procedures at exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps.

D. Sloping Floors:

E. The running slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:20.

1. The cross slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:48.

2. At plazas where there is no dominant direction of travel, and at turns, slope shall not exceed 1:48 in any direction.

2.02 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00.

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, type as indicated on drawings.

1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.

2. Color: Standard Gray UNO.

B. Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, Type MS – Blended Hydraulic Cement

1. Cement used in contact with soil shall be Type HS – Sulfate Resistant.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M and CBC 1909.2.1.

1. Aggregate shall be nonreactive as determined by one of the methods in ASTM C33/C33M Appendix XI: Methods for Evaluating Potential for Deleterious Expansion Due to Alkali Reactivity of an Aggregate.

2. Fine Aggregate: Washed natural sand consisting of hard particles, containing not more than the maximum limits of deleterious material allowed by Table 1 of ASTM C33/C33M. a. Fineness modulus shall be in the range of 2.90 to 3.10.

3. Coarse Aggregate, Structural Concrete:
a. Clean washed gravel or sound crushed rock, containing not more than 5 percent flat, thin, elongated, or laminated material, and containing not more than the maximum limits of deleterious material allowed by Table 3 of ASTM C33/C33M for moderate weathering regions.
1) Grade 1-inch aggregate from No. 100 sieve to 1 inch. 2) Grade 1-1/2-inch aggregate from No. 100 sieve to 1-1/2 inches. b. Maximum Size: As indicated on drawings and as noted below. 1) Aggregate shall be no larger than:
(a) 3/4 of the clear space between reinforcing bars or between reinforcing bars and forms
(b) 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms (c) 1/3 of the depth of slab.
2) 3/8" aggregate may be utilized at areas of congestion only when submitted for review, indicating specifically where intended use will be, and approved by the architect.
3) Pea Gravel shall not be used.

4. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.

D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.

1. Provide lightweight aggregates having a loss of not more than 8 percent when tested by sodium sulfate solution and a loss of not more than 10 percent when tested by magnesium sulfate solution in accordance with ASTM C 88

2. Maximum Size: 3/4 in or as noted below.
a. Aggregate shall be no larger than:
1) 3/4 of the clear space between reinforcing bars or between reinforcing bars and forms
2) 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms 3) 1/3 of the depth of slab.

E. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

F. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M
G. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.

H. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.

I. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.

2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. General:

1. Admixtures and additives shall be reviewed by architect prior to use.

2. Admixtures and additives shall be incorporated and tested in accepted combinations and mixes

3. Admixtures containing chlorides will not be permitted.

B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; PLASTOL 6420: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Master Builders Solutions; MasterRheobuild 1000: www.master-builders- solutions.com/en-us
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A.

1. Water reduction: Not less than 5%.

2. Increase in compressive strength: Not less than 10% at 28 days.

3. Dry Shrinkage: Less than concrete without admixture at 21 days.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; EUCON NW: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture:

1. ASTM C494/C494M, Type S.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; Eucon SRA Floor: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Euclid Chemical Company; Eucon SRA-XT: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

F. Plasticizer: ASTM C494/C494M , Type F

2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Min 15 mils thick, reinforced high density polyethylene sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 Perms maximum, in accordance with ASTM E154/E154M Section 7.

2. Puncture Resistance: 2200 grams minimum, in accordance with ASTM D1709 Method B.

3. Tensile Strength: 45 lbf/in minimum, in accordance with ASTM E154/E154M Section 9, Method ASTM D882.

4. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.

5. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.

6. Manufacturers: Comply with ASTM C755
a. ISI Building Products; Viper VaporCheck II 15-mil (Class A): www.isibp.com/#sle. b. Basis of Design: Stego Industries, LLC: www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; PERMINATOR Class A - 15 mils (0.38 mm):
www.wrmeadows.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Subslab Waterproofing (At Floor Slabs Subject to Minor Hydraulic Moisture Pressures): Vapor barrier under slab on grade with hydraulic moisture pressures or wet soils.

1. Reinforced high density polyethylene (HDPE), mylar geomembrane, or 1/8-inch thick pre- molded membrane having the following minimum properties:
a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.005 Perms maximum, in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
b. Water Vapor Barrier Classification: Class A, in accordance with ASTM E1745. c. Puncture Resistance: 2400 grams minimum, in accordance with ASTM D1709 Method B.
d. Tensile Strength: 70 lbf/in minimum, in accordance with ASTM E154/E154M Section 9, Method ASTM D882.

2. Accessory Products: Provide vapor proofing mastic, pipe boots, and related accessory products recommended by manufacturer of vapor retarder.

3. Manufacturers: Comply with ASTM C755.
a. Alumiseal Corporation; Alumiseal Zero Perm Vapor Barrier. b. Reef Industries; Griffolyn VAPORguard.
c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15-Mil Class A Vapor Barrier. d. Substituitions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

4. Seam Tape:
a. High density reinforced polyethylene vapor retarding seam tape with pressure sensitive adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of vapor retarder/barrier.

Minimum 4 inches in width and of a contrasting color.

5. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout:
a. Non-Shrink Grout: Prepackaged, non-metallic, non-gaseous, aggregate grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Contractor shall select type for each special application as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: As indicated on the Contract Drawings.
c. Flowable Products:
1) Euclid Chemical Company; NS GROUT: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. 2) Five Star Products, Inc; Five Star Fluid Grout 100:
www.fivestarproducts.com/#sle.
3) The QUIKRETE Companies; QUIKRETE® Exterior Use Anchoring Cement:
www.quikrete.com/#sle.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. d. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products:
1) Euclid Chemical Company; DRY PACK GROUT:
www.euclidchemical.com/#sle.
2) Five Star Products, Inc; Five Star Grout: www.fivestarproducts.com/#sle.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 10
3) The QUIKRETE Companies; QUIKRETE® FastSet™ Non-Shrink Grout:
www.quikrete.com/#sle.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

6. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non- metallic aggregate, and activator.
a. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM C579: 12,000 pounds per square inch.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Euclid Chemical Company; E3-DEEP POUR: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. 2) Five Star Products, Inc; Five Star DP Epoxy Grout:
www.fivestarproducts.com/#sle.
3) Five Star Products, Inc; Five Star HP Epoxy Grout:
www.fivestarproducts.com/#sle.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

7. Patching Mortar:
a. Provide Polymer modified portland cement mortar. Compressive strength shall equal or exceed compressive strength of substrate concrete.
b. Mortars shall conform to ASTM C928.
c. Manufacturers:
1) Horizontal Application:
(a) Durapatch Industrial, manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals. (b) Embeco R310, manufactured by BASF Admixture Systems. (c) ProSpec Vinyl Concrete Patch, as manufactured by Bonsal American. 2) Vertical and Overhead application: equal to:
(a) Durapatch VOH, manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals. (b) Emaco R350, manufactured by BASF Admixture Systems. (c) ProSpec Vertical Leveling Mortar, as manufactured by Bonsal American.

8. Floor Leveling Compound: Two-part acrylic polymer latex concrete with compressive strength as tested by ASTM C109/C109M equal or greater than substrate concrete compressive strength.
a. Manfacturers:
1) Ardex; K-15.
2) L&M Construction Chemicals; Levelex.
3) Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right Plus.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

9. Floor Patching Materials:
a. Patching Materials shall match or exceed compressive strength of the substrate concrete.
1) Interstate Epoxy Patching Compound.
2) Sakrete Fast Setting Cement Patcher.
3) ProSpec Floor Patch Pro, manufactured by Bonsal American.

10. Skim Coat: Blended compound of portland cement, graded silica aggregates, and special chemical additives formulated for bonding, smoothing, rubbing, and thin coating concrete surfaces.
a. Pavecrete manufactured by Lyons Manufacturing or Rapid Set WunderFixx manufactured by CTC Cement.
b. Bonding Agent: Manufacturer's Type II acrylic bonding agent, when applicable. Do not use PVA Type I bonding agents.
c. Pigment: SGS ColorFlo Liquid iron oxide color pigments, as manufactured by Solomon Colors, or equal, in accordance with ASTM C 979. d. Admixture: Chromix-L manufactured by L.M. Scofield Products, or equal product manufactured by Davis Colors.

11. Isolation Joint Sealant: Provide polyurethane type compatible with fiber joint filler.

2.07 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Chemical Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. Agent shall be freeze-thaw resistant and suitbable for brush or spray application.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; AKKRO-7T: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Larsen Products Corp.; Weldcrete.
c. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513.

1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.

D. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.

2.08 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Floor Liquid Curing Compound Type FCC: For use on concrete slabs that will be exposed with separately applied floor sealer finish, or on slabs that will be covered by breathable floor coverings or mortar beds.

1. Compound shall be a water-based non-staining dissipating, translucent resin, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.
a. Sodium silicate compounds will not be permitted.

2. Product shall be compatible with subsequently applied toppings (sealers, hardeners, finishes, or coverings).

3. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Co,; Kurex Vox.
b. L&M Construction Chemicals; L&M Cure R.
c. Sonneborn Building Products; Sonosil.
d. W.R. Meadows; Sealtight 1100 Clear.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements B. Curing Barriers:

1. Waterproof Curing Paper: Conform to ASTM C171, non-staining reinforced type. a. Manufacturer:
1) Fortifiber Corporation; Orange Label Sisalkraft.

2. Reinforced Curing Barriers: Transguard 4000 manufactured by Reef Industries or equal.

C. Floor Remedial Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control Sealer Type FCS: For remedial use on concrete slabs on grade that do not meet manufacturer's specific moisture emission and alkalinity limits for non-breathable floor finishes.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Sinak Corporation; Sinak VC5: www.sinak.com.
b. Bonsal American; ProSpec Moisture Guard Max.
c. Synthetics International; Synthetic30 two-component liquid-applied, waterborne polymer-based ultra-low viscosity clear sealer. www.syntheticsintl.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements D. Floor Sealer Finish Type FSF: For general use at exposed concrete slab areas for appearance.

1. Design is based on the use of high solids, minimum 25% non-yellowing water- based acrylic cure/sealer conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B and ASTM C1315, Type 1, Grade B, low VOC compliant meeting all local air quality regulations.

2. Product shall be in compliance with volatile organic compounds (VOC) content limits required by air quality management district at the time of performance of the work.

3. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces at Garage Areas:
a. Compound shall be a water-based non-staining dissipating, translucent resin, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B.

4. Sodium silicate compounds will not be permitted.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Euclid Aqua Cure VOX Super.
b. L&M Construction Chemicals; Dress & Seal WB30.
c. W.R. Meadows; VOComp 25.
d. Sinak Corporation; HLQ-125.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements E. Wall Sealer and Water Repellent Finish Type WSR: For general use at exposed concrete wall surfaces in Restrooms for code compliance.

1. Design is based on the use of a modified neat silane repellent system offering invisible protection and low volatility combined with water and oil repellency on concrete substrates to prevent staining by waterborne and oily substance.

2. Product shall be in compliance with volatile organic compounds (VOC) content limits required by air quality management district at the time of performance of the work.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Miracle Sealants Co.; 511 Impregnator.
b. Prosoco, Inc.; Stand Off SLX100 Water & Oil Repellent. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.09 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Global Warming Potential Reduction for embodied carbon footprint: Provide embodied carbon footprint reduction for concrete by 25%.

B. Mix design shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of California.

C. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

D. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.

E. The proportioning of ingredients shall be such that the concrete can be readily worked into forms and around reinforcement under the conditions of placement to be used, without segregation or excessive bleeding.

F. Concrete Compressive Strengths: Provide compressive strengths as noted on drawings, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days.

1. Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
a. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

G. Fly Ash or other pozzolans Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight.

H. Total of fly ash or natural pozzolans and silica fume: Maximum 35 percent by weight.

I. Total of fly ash or natural pozzolans slag cement and silica fume: Maximum 50 percent by weight.

J. Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: As indicated on the Contract Drawings

1. Slabs-on-Grade: Water to cement content shall not exceed a ratio of 0.42 upon delivery at site.

2. Other Concrete Not in Contact with Soils: Water to cement content shall not exceed a ratio of 0.45 upon delivery to site.

K. Maximum Slump: As indicated on the Contract Drawings LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 13
L. Accurately control the proportions, water content, and air content. Use weighing equipment accurate to within 1 percent for cement and 2 percent for aggregates, and adjustable for varying aggregate moisture content. A beam auxiliary shall register any part of the last 100 pounds of each aggregate. The aggregate hopper shall have a volume adjustment.

1. Proportion concrete by weight of loose, dry material.

2. Fine aggregate volume shall be at least 35 percent of the sum of the separate fine and coarse aggregate volumes.

M. Admixtures: Admixtures may only be used if they are incorporated into the accepted concrete mix designs and testing. Where admixture is proposed for use by concrete supplier, conform to types accepted by Architect in writing.

1. Proposed admixtures shall be as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer.

N. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate indicated on drawings and in accordance to manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniform and complete distribution based on manufacturer's recommendations.

O. Tests for Concrete Materials at Batch Plant: Utilizing batch plant test records, perform the following tests in accordance with provisions of the building code:

1. Cement: Sample and test cement, or provide mill test reports, as accepted, certifying that the cement conforms to the requirements of this Specification.

2. Aggregate:
a. Sample and test concrete aggregate for grading and soundness before concrete mix designs are established.
b. Test aggregate for shrinkage characteristics in accordance with ASTM C157/C157M. c. Conduct petrographic examinations of aggregate proposed for use in accordance with ASTM C295/C295M.

3. Air Content: ASTM C173/C173M, volumetric method or ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method. One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

4. Refer to "Field Quality Control" in Part 3 for testing of actual concrete mix and placement.

P. Inspection: Accompany each load of materials or concrete with a signed copy of batch plant's certificate stating quantity of each material, design strength, amount of water added at plant, admixtures, departure time and date, and maximum amount of water allowed to be added at site.

Q. Shrinkage Test:

1. Before placing any concrete, prepare a trial batch of the mix design, using the same aggregates, cement, and admixtures (if any) proposed for use on the project. Prepare at least three specimens for determining the drying shrinkage of the mix design.

2. The drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4"x4"x11" prisms, made, cured, dried, and measured as specified in ASTM C157/C157M7. Measure and report separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying. After 7 days of moist curing. The effective gauge length of the specimens shall be 10 inches.

3. The average drying shrinkage of the test specimens after 28 days of drying shall not exceed 0.045 percent for footing and grade beams, and 0.035 percent for all other locations. Use adequate amount of shrinkage reducing admixture as required.

2.10 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M and ASTM C94/C94M.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 60 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

4. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve consistent color from batch to batch.

5. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions.

B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

1. With each load, provide ticket certifying the materials and quantities as well as compliance with the accepted mix design.

C. On the transit mix ticket, state the time water was first added to the mix.

1. At the batch plant, withhold 2-1/2 gallons of water per cubic yard of concrete.

2. Upon arrival at the job site, as directed by the Testing Laboratory Inspector, add all or part of the withheld water before the concrete is discharged from the mixer.

3. Mix concrete for not less than 5 minutes after the withheld water has been added, and not less than 1 minute of that time immediately prior to discharge of the batch. a. Drum shall rotate approximately 70 to 100 revolutions at a mixing speed of approximately 6 to 18 rpm.
b. After mixing, drum shall rotate at an agitating speed of approximately 2 to 6 rpm. c. Unless otherwise directed, provide 15 minutes total mixing per batch after first addition of water.

4. Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 90 minutes after water is introduced into the mix, or before the drum has completed 300 revolutions.

D. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump.

E. Weather Requirements:

1. Hot Weather Usage: Adjust mix as required to counteract effects of anticipated or probable hot weather on strength of concrete. Conform to recommendations of ACI 305R regarding admixtures, temperature of mixing water, and delivery times. a. During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that may impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
b. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F, limit mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, limit mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to performing work and placing concrete, verify:

1. Lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

2. Elevations and depressions of floor finishes

3. Final excavation required for foundations and footings prior to placing concrete.

4. Locations of proposed and future breathable and nonbreathable floor finishes in advance of placing concrete to determine type of floor sealers to be applied in finishing operations.

5. Formwork is properly located such that the unshored concrete will maintain specified tolerances after forms are removed.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Formwork: Comply with Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

B. Reinforcing: Comply with Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 15
D. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

E. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning, roughening to exposed aggregate, and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.

1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.

F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade over properly prepared subbase per Geotechnical recommendations. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Tape and seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.

1. Place Slab on Grade directly on vapor retarder.

2. Avoid grade staking through vapor retarder.

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

1. Pour concrete in accordance with accepted pour schedule and construction joint layout.

B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

C. Notify Architect not less than 48 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.

D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.

F. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints per ACI and CBC requirements. Where construction joints are located, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.

G. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.

H. Compacting:

1. General: Spade, rod, vibrate, and consolidate concrete in forms. Vibrators shall not be left in any one spot longer than 30 seconds and shall be kept constantly in motion. One vibrator shall be assigned to each location where concrete is being placed and a standby vibrator shall be kept ready at all times. Avoid creating rock pockets, air bubbles, honeycomb, or separation of ingredients.

2. Work concrete thoroughly around reinforcement and embedded items and into corners and angles of forms by spading, rodding, and tamping.

3. Consolidation: Vibrate to consolidate each layer with previously placed layers, completely embedding reinforcing and fixtures, and bringing fine material to surface of slab to produce proper finish.

I. Hot Weather Placing: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R.

J. Cold Weather Placing: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306R.

3.04 GROUTING
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Install non-shrink grout per drawing properly beneath bearings of plates, columns, and other structural members using product recommended by manufacturer for specific application and in accordance with printed instructions.

1. Compressive strength of grout shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M .

3.05 CONTROL AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Control Joints:

1. Location: As indicated on the Contract Drawings, but not more than 20 feet on centers in both directions at exterior slabs. Limit interior slabs on grade to 400 square foot bays with length to width ratios of 1 to 1.5 maximum.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 16
a. Locate on column center lines and at re-entry corners wherever practical. b. Avoid areas receiving tile or paver floor finish.
c. Coordinate locations with proposed floor finish joint layout. d. Limit length to width ratios to 1 to 1.25.

B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.

C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.

D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; with width and depth as indicated on drawings.

1. Fill saw cuts in interior walkways with control joint filler specified.

E. Construction Joints:

1. Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following:

2. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement.

3. A mix containing the same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.

4. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.

3.06 SEPARATE NON-STRUCTURAL FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.

B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.

C. Non-structural toppings slabs shall be normal-weight concrete, reinforced as noted on the Contract Drawings.

D. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.

1. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 20 feet in either direction.

3.07 TOLERANCES FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for compliance with specified tolerances.

B. Conform to requirements of ACI 117, except as modified by the requirements of these Specifications and CBC.

C. Formed Surfaces:

1. Maintain bowing, warping, and dimensional tolerances within the maximum tolerances stated in ACI 117 for Class A surfaces.

2. Overall Dimension for Height and Width: Plus zero to minus 3/32-inch for surfaces that are 10 feet and over.

3. Thickness: Plus-or-minus 1/8-inch maximum.

4. Openings: Accurate to within a tolerance of plus 1/8-inch to minus zero.

5. Exposed Slab Edges: Free of jogs exceeding 1/8-inch.

D. Concrete Slabs: Floor finish tolerances shall be measured in accordance with ASTM E1155 and ACI 302.1R the F-Number System (Inch-Pound Units) for the following conditions:

Element Specified Overall Value Minimum Local Value
FF FL FF FL
Slab-on-Grade:

Mech and Electrical Rooms, parking
structures 20 15 15 10
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 17
Carpeted 25 20 17 15
Thinset Tile, Resilient Flooring 35 25 24 17
Wood Flooring 50 35 35 35
Other not indicated 35 25 24 17
Suspended Slabs:

Mechanical and Electrical Rooms, parking
structures 20 15
(SHORED)

N/A N/A
Carpeted 25 20
(SHORED)
Thinset Tile, Resilient Flooring 35 25
(SHORED)
Wood Flooring 50 35
(SHORED)
Other not indicated 35 25
(SHORED)
E. Verify flatness requirements in accordance with Owner's specification requirements prior to installation.

F. Suspended Slab Levelness: Where FL is not specified (unshored conditions) floors must be level, and the elevation of the top surface shall fall within a 3/4-inch envelope in accordance with ASCC Tolerances for Suspended Concrete Slabs, unless part of a sloping floor or as otherwise noted.

G. Concrete Door Sills:

1. Slabs Under Operable Partitions or Sound-Rated Accordion Doors: 1/8-inch from level along line under partition or door.

2. Slabs Under Roll-up Doors: 1/8-inch from level along line under partition or door.

H. Levelness tolerances shall be measured within 72 hours after slab concrete placement.

1. Tolerances for sloped floors shall not exceed the slopes specified in "REGULARTORY REQUIREMENTS" in Part 2.

I. Owner reserves the right to test floors and concrete members for conformance to ACI 117 by Use of the Dipstick Floor Profiler. Should tolerances not be within the limits specified, the Contractor shall be required to pay the cost of the tests, as well as the repairs required to bring work into compliance.

J. Corrective Procedures: See "FILLING, LEVELING AND PATCHING."

1. Areas requiring corrective work should be identified and submitted to Architect. Re- measure corrected areas by the same process.

3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Formed Concrete

1. Surface Repairs: Repair surface defects, including defective areas and tie holes as recommended in ACI 301 Section 2 or 6.

2. Rough-Formed Finish: Cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, not arranged in any specific visual manner. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas.

Rub down or chip off fins and other projections exceeding 1/4-inch in height. a. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

3. Smooth-Formed Finish: Cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections. a. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp-proofing, veneer plaster, or painting.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 18
b. Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301 Section 6, to smooth-formed finished concrete.
1) Grout-cleaned finish.
2) Smooth-rubbed finish.

4. Painted Finish: Entire surface area exposed to view shall be free of voids, cracks, spalls, protrusions, or non-uniform textures.
a. Prior to sacking, prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting and Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting as applicable. b. Entire surface area of concrete exposed to view shall be repaired, resurfaced, and made ready to receive paint finish specified under Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting and Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting as applicable. 1) Resurfacing of concrete panel surfaces shall be accomplished with specified resurfacing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the preparation and application procedures of ACI 503.4.
c. Interior surfaces at window openings shall be ground smooth, resurfaced, and prepared to receive sealants.
1) Resurface concrete sills, jambs, and heads with specified resurfacing, patching, and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (a) Interior surfaces at openings shall be ground smooth, resurfaced, and prepared to receive sealants.
d. Finish repaired surfaces with primer and two coats of paint finish as specified under Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting and Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting as applicable.

5. Related Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Electrostatic Coatings: Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

7. Patching and Skim Coating: Refer to "FILLING, LEVELING AND PATCHING." B. Flatwork

1. Screeding: Work out irregularities and bring surfaces to true finish grade or elevation.

Remove excess water and debris worked to the surface during compaction and screeding.

2. Initial Troweling:
a. Do not commence troweling until surface water sheen has disappeared. b. Use wood bullfloats to open top of slab to allow bleed water out. c. Do not use metal floats.
d. Do not apply dry cement, sand, or water to surface.
e. Slabs to Receive Mortar-bed with Topping or Bonded Finish: Upon completion of pour, and before concrete has hardened, texture surface of slab with stiff broom, or roughen surface.
f. Slabs to Receive Crack Isolation Membrane or Mortar-bed with Cleavage Membrane:

Finish slabs with typical smooth troweled surface.

3. Final Troweling:
a. Interior Slabs: Steel trowel and burnish.
1) Do not finish slab until bleed water has evaporated. 2) Do not apply water to the concrete during finishing. 3) Do not allow rainwater to stand on slab.
b. Sills and Other Weather Surfaces: Smooth trowel and burnish. Finish external angles uniform and tooled.
c. Sealer: Where specified, apply in accordance with the requirements of Section 033511.

4. Finish for Interior Stairs:

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 19
a. Sprinkle abrasive aggregate uniformly on unhardened surface immediately prior to finishing, at the rate of 2 pounds per square yard. Work into surface during finishing.

Rub lightly to expose abrasive aggregate while concrete is green. b. Concrete walking surfaces shall have a minimum slip resistance coefficient of friction of 0.6 as tested in accordance with ASTM D 2047.
c. Stairs: Apply grooves and tooled edges to tread nosing in accordance with the Contract Drawings.
1) Provide medium broom finish.
d. Warning Stripes: Apply 2-inch wide warning stripe of 70 percent contrasting color at top and bottom nosing of each run at interior stairs, 1 inch maximum from edge of nosing.
e. Pedestrian, General:
1) Provide medium broom finish.
2) Medium acid etch finish.

5. Float Finish:
a. After screeding, consolidating, and straightening concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating.
b. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats. The application of Portland cement to slab during floating or troweling is prohibited. c. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and frill low spots. Repeat float passes and straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
d. Finish to straightedge tolerance.
e. Cut down high areas and fill in low areas.
f. After straightening, refloat surface to uniform, smooth, granular texture. g. Locations:
1) Surfaces scheduled for trowel and broom finishes.
2) Surfaces scheduled to receive adhered roofing or waterproofing membrane. 3) Surfaced scheduled to receive thick-set mortar beds on cleavage membrane.

6. Trowel Finish:
a. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. b. Finish to straightedged tolerance.
c. Locations:
1) Surfaces scheduled to receive thin-set mortar beds, resilient flooring, carpet, and wood flooring.
2) Exposed surfaces.
3) Surfaces scheduled to receive paint or other thin film finish coating.

7. Medium Broom Finish:
a. Provide float finish and let set.
b. While surface is still plastic draw medium stiff fiber bristle broom uniformly over surface to provide texture perpendicular to main traffic direction. c. Locations:
1) Stair treads.

8. Heavy Broom Finish:
a. Provide float finish and let set.
b. Texture: While surface is still plastic, swirl stiff fiber bristle broom uniformly over level surfaces and perpendicular to main traffic direction at ramp surfaces. c. Locations:
1) Parking garage areas.

9. Acid Wash: Top-Cast No. 3 Light Etch.
a. Provide acid containment area and comply with CAL OSHA for application and cleanup.
b. First Wash: Three days after pour.
c. Second Wash: Three weeks after first application.
d. Third Wash: At time of final completion of Project.
e. Appearance: Slab surfaces shall exhibit an aggregate exposure of fine aggregate particles constituting not less than 60 percent and not more than 80 percent of the surface, as directed by Architect. Exposure shall be of sufficient depth to provide a surface profile of between 1/16-inch and 3/16-inch.

10. Electrostatic Control Coating: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

1. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects.

3.09 SEALING
A. Formed Concrete Surface:

1. Interior Vertical Surfaces: Where indicated on Contract Drawings, treat vertical surfaces of interior exposed formed concrete with specified sealer finish Type WSR. a. Apply protective treatment in saturating applications without atomizing the product.

Use enough to thoroughly wet the surface and create a slight rundown below the spray pattern. Apply uniformly. Don’t over apply.
1) Provide two applications of protective treatment at exposed concrete toilet room wall locations. Apply the second coat within a few minutes after the first coat has penetrated and appears dry; do not atomize the product during application. b. Brush heavy runs and drips thoroughly into the surface. c. Protect treated surfaces from contact or by water or for 4 hours.

2. Exterior Vertical Surfaces: Where indicated on Contract Drawings, treat vertical surfaces of exterior exposed formed concrete with sealer in accordance with specified sealer finish Type FSF.

B. Flatwork

1. Grind and clean floors prior to sealing.

2. Sealer/Dustproofer:
a. Prepare substrates and spray apply curing sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
b. Locations:
c. Mechanical rooms, main trash room, electrical rooms, and telephone rooms. d. Other locations where indicated or scheduled in Contract Drawings.

3. Penetrating Sealer:
a. Sealed Concrete Type SC2: Polish with clear finish in accordance with Section 03 35 13 - High-Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing.

3.10 CURING
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R and ACI 318. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

1. Normal concrete: Not less than seven days.

C. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing.

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Curing Compound: Cure by completely and uniformly applying liquid curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply at least two coats at right angles to each other.
a. Reapply curing membrane at saw cut joints and at exposed edges of slab after removal of forms.
b. Omit curing compound and use moisture curing where required to provide floor sealer.
c. Omit curing compound where curing/sealing compound specified provides a concurrent curing function and is applied at the time of concrete placement appropriate to such function.
d. Slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.

2. Continuous Moisture: Cure by keeping concrete continuously wet for a period of at least 7 days after pouring in accordance with ACI 308R and ACI 318 for curing interior slabs to receive flooring finishes. During periods of high temperature, low humidity, or wind, wet concrete as often as required to keep concrete continuously moist for a period of at least 10 days. Cover with waterproof curing paper or reinforced vapor retarder, maintaining a film of water.

3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.

E. Ambient Conditions:

1. Hot Weather Curing:

2. Conform to recommendations of ACI 305R regarding curing of concrete flatwork in hot weather.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed testing agency.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.

D. Testing:

1. Sample fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94/C94M.

2. Slump: Test will be performed in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. One test will be made for each concrete load at point of discharge and one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test will be taken hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below, and when 80 degrees F or above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made.

4. Curing: Cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M.

5. Frequency of Compressive Strength Testing: Test will be made in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M, ACI 318, CBC Chapter 19A, and Table 1705A.3.
a. Test one set of four cylinders for each concrete class placed in any one day for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, or for each 2000 square feet of surface area placed. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, two at 28 days, and:
1) When frequency of testing will provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing from at least five randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer will be conducted.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 22
b. If the average of strength tests of all strength tests of a given class of concrete equals or exceeds the specified strength at 28 days, with no individual strength test less than 500 psi below that specified, the strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory.
c. Retain one cylinder for testing at 56 days if 28-day test fails.

E. Moisture Vapor Emission Testing: After concrete slabs have cured and prior to installation of finish flooring materials, verify that moisture content and alkali content of concrete slabs do not exceed limits acceptable to manufacturer of flooring materials.

1. Testing Equipment: Test methods based on ASTM F2170 using RH meters and testing kits equal to AMT Moisture/Relative Humidity Meter manufactured by American Moisture Test, Inc., or equivalent by Vaprecision Testing Systems may be used at testing agency's option except at concrete floors with exposed or polished finish.

2. Alkalinity: Concrete pH test using calibrated digital 1-14 wide range pH meter equal to PH100 to determine alkalinity level in accordance with ASTM F710. Paper and pencil type tests are not acceptable.

3. Calcium Chloride Testing: After building air conditioning has been in operation for at least 15 days, calcium chloride and pH testing kits may be used: Prepackaged test kit of commercial consistency, equipped with a sealed dish of anhydrous calcium chloride, a metering dome with butyl rubber gasket and instructions for implementation. Weigh dishes on site prior to installation. Conform with requirements of ASTM F1869.

F. Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Testing:

1. Perform vapor emission and alkalinity testing and take appropriate action based on results in relation to finish floor manufacturer's moisture and alkalinity requirements.

G. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

3.12 FILLING, LEVELING AND PATCHING
A. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired, or as directed by Architect.

1. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances with approval from Architect.

2. Low spots shall be filled with floor leveling compound, installed in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.

C. Patching Exposed Concrete: After flushing with water, pack tie wire, nail, bolt, and core sample holes which will be exposed as soon as possible after form removal. Grout and repair rough pockets, cracks, or honeycomb. If patches are required, chip defective areas to a uniform depth of at least 1 inch with sides at right angles to surface.

1. Match surrounding concrete surfaces in color and texture. Make trial patch to determine color match. Before applying, moisten surrounding concrete and apply specified bonding compound.

2. Smooth Formed Concrete: Grind off ridges, offsets, and other prominent marks of smooth formed concrete while concrete is green and grind smooth. Sack exposed concrete surfaces.
a. Painted concrete shall be considered as being exposed.

3. Patch defects deeper than 1/2-inch in panels with specified patching material and methods deemed by the Architect as the appropriate method to correct such defects.

D. Skim Coating: Where sack and patch is noted on Contract Drawings, apply to architectural formed cast-in-place concrete walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. New concrete must be cured 28 days.

2. pH must be verified prior to skim coating application to determine if primer needs to be applied, as required by manufacturer.

3. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258.

4. Mixing Skim Coat:
a. Add to water, adding only enough to make a stiff trowelable consistency like soft putty.
b. Add color additive.
c. Working Time: Approximately 15 minutes.

5. Apply to walls with trowel in smooth uniform coat in continuous operations to maintain a uniform shade.

6. Patching: Broad deep areas in concrete surface shall be filled with skim coat material in accordance with manufacturer's directions prior to application of skim coat. Where surfaces are shiny smooth, apply manufacturer's Type II bonding agent.

E. Patching Unexposed Concrete: Ridges, offsets, and other prominent marks need not be ground off, cleaned, or sacked. This requirement applies to concrete areas that will be concealed by other construction.

1. Finish below-grade concrete indicated to receive waterproofing in the same manner as exposed, smooth-formed concrete, except that surfaces need not be sacked.

2. Patch and repair concrete slabs ready to receive future finish materials installed by Owner.

3.13 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Strength

1. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test.

2. If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, falls below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.

3. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective and shall be evaluated by Architect and replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and DSA.

4. Test Cores: Should required test cylinders fail to show minimum design compressive strength, take test cores at locations coordinated with the Architect. a. If results show compressive strength to be less than design stress, concrete shall be deemed defective and shall be replaced in a manner acceptable to the Architect and DSA.
b. If results show compressive strength to conform to design stress, grout solid coring holes with grout exceeding design compressive strength and finish to match adjacent surface.

B. Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within tolerances of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, cracked, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced.

C. Concrete substrates for non-breathable floor finishes that indicate by testing excess quantities of moisture and alkalinity shall require remedial measures, as specified in this Section.

D. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing, including patching for cores, shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

E. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area.

3.14 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

B. Wash and clean flatwork surfaces. Leave free from oil, paint, plaster, form coating, and other foreign substances, ready to receive scheduled finishes.

3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture for Cast-in-
Place Concrete - AVECS 03 30 05 - 1
SECTION 03 30 05

MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE - AVECS PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.01 MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE
A. Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): ASTM C494/C494M, Type S; liquid, inorganic admixture free of volatile organic compounds (VOCs); formulated to react with cementitious material to integrally and permanently restricting capillary systems formed during curing.

1. Hydraulic Conductivity: 19.7 x 10^-8 fps, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D5084.

2. Concrete Shrinkage Reduction at 28 Days: 50 percent, minimum, when compared to mix design without MVRA and both tested according to ASTM C157/C157M.

3. Toxicity: None.

4. Odor: None.

5. Flammability: None.

6. VOC: Zero.

7. Solvent: Water.

8. Freezing Temperature: 32 degrees F.

9. Hazardous Vapors: None.

10. Capillary Break: Calcium silicate hydrate.

11. pH: 11.3.

12. Weight: 8.83 lbs per gal.

13. Specific Gravity: 1.044.

14. Products:

END OF SECTION 03 30 05
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 1
SECTION 04 05 11

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.

B. Grout for masonry.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 01 00 - Maintenance of Masonry: Bedding and pointing mortar for masonry restoration work.

B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2023.

B. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2023.

C. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2018.

D. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2022.

E. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2018.

F. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2019a, with Editorial Revision.

G. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Concrete and High Strength Mortar; 2023.

H. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2018.

I. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2023.

J. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Methods for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2023.

K. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2016.

L. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout for Masonry; 2020.

M. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry; 1995 (Reapproved 2013).

N. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2022, with Errata.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations.

C. Samples: Submit four samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.

D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating compliance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C780.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract Documents.

1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

2. Regulatory Requirements: Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details indicated, reinforced concrete unit masonry consturciton shall conform ot the California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 21A - Masonry.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 2
A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A. Use only factory premixed packaged dry materials for mortar and grout, with addition of water only at project site.

1. Exception: If a specified mix design is not available in a premixed dry package, provide equivalent mix design using standard non-premixed materials.

B. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.

C. Grout Mix Designs:

1. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; mix in accordance with ASTM C476.
a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

2. Mix design shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of California.

3. Inclusion of water-reducing admixture not permitted, unless noted otherwise.

4. Where high-lift grouting method is employed, an admixture of the type that reduces early water loss to the masonry units and produces an expansive action shall be included in the mix design.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime, and sand; complying with ASTM C387/C387M and capable of producing mortar of the specified strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.

1. Type: Type S.

2. Color: Custom color to match block.

B. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.

1. Color(s): to match block.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Solomon Colors; Solomon Colors Concentrated A, H and X Series:
www.solomoncolors.com/#sle.
b. ORCO Block Company.
c. Angeles Block Co. Inc.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. Water: Clean and potable.

D. Admixture: Expanding, water-reducing admixture for high-lift grouting.

E. Water-Resistant Admixture: Liquid water repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following:
a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar.
b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.
c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.

F. Bonding Agent: Latex type.

2.03 MORTAR MIXING
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 3
A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C1142, Type equivalent to that specified according to ASTM C270.

B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.

C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.

D. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

E. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

F. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

2.04 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.

B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.

C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

1. Basis of Design Product: Grout Aid as manufacturerd by Sika, or approved equal.

D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.

B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout pressure.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.

B. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding.

3.03 GROUTING
A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of Contract Documents.

B. Low-Lift Grouting:

1. Limit height of pours to 48 inches.

2. Limit height of masonry to 8 inches above each pour.

3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.

4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.

C. High-Lift Grouting:

1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours.

2. Hollow Masonry: Limit lifts to maximum 4 feet and pours to maximum height of 12 feet.

3. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

END OF SECTION 04 05 11
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 1
SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete block.

B. Mortar and grout.

C. Reinforcement and anchorage.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Dovetail slots for masonry anchors.

B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.

C. Section 04 05 11 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting.

D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.

1. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.

2. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.

3. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.

4. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.

5. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

6. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

7. ASTM C207 - Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

8. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

9. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

10. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

11. ASTM C979 - Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.

12. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and admixture products.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide rebar submittal per section 032000.

D. Samples: Submit four samples of masonry unit and mortar units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details indicated, reinforced concrete unit masonry construction shall conform to the California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 21A - Masonry.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 2
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surfact or visually related surfaces.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UPS
A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar, accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Masonry Units, General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required.

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and by thickness of wall as indicated on conctract drawings

2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured per plan.

3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, medium weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed Faces: Special colors and texture as indicated on the contract drawings. c. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's exposed ends to match exposed faces at corner and end of wall conditions.
d. Pattern: Stacked bond.
e. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength of 2000 psi, and not less than the unit strength indicated. f. Manufacturers:
1) RCP Block & Brick
2) ORCO Block Company.
3) Angeles Block Co. Inc.
4) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

4. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units. a. Products:
1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.
2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.
3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 11.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

C. Verify dowels are properly located.

D. Do not commence installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level, or until floor slabs are structurally sound. Clean projecting dowels free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, and other material that will inhibit bond.

E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of unit masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

F. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.

2. Mortar Joints: Raked.

3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

1. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.

C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

E. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.

F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.

3.06 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Lap splices minimum 48 bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings.

B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position.

C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.07 CONTROL JOINTS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 4
A. Continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.

B. Control Joints: Locate control joints maximum 24 feet on center or as indicated on the contract drawings. If not shown, provide submittal to Architect with proposed locations for approval.

C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch wide and deep.

1. Provide continuous fully mortared head joints at control joints, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the contract drawings.

D. Comply with Section 07 92 00 for sealant performance

3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Verify tolerances prior to placing next course. If the unit placed does not meet the tolerances listed below, it shall be removed and reinstalled to meet specified tolerances at no additional cost to the owner.

B. Install masonry within the site tolerances found in TMS 402/602.

C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.

E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.

F. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch.

G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.09 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 014529 - Testing Laboratory Servies.

3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.12 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION 04 20 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Unit Masonry Finishes 04 22 11 - 1
SECTION 04 22 11

UNIT MASONRY FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings, progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry finishes.

1. Integral colored CMU.

2. Integral water repellents.

3. Mortar colors.

4. Clear sealer.

5. Graffiti control.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for structural requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.

B. Samples for Initial Selection for the following:

1. Integral colored CMU

2. Pigmented mortar
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 60 inches high by full thickness.

2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

4. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.05 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit masonry finishes that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer's Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. CMU:

1. RCP Block and Brick. (Basis of Design).

2. ORCO Block Company..

3. Angelus Block..

4. Or equal.

B. Integral Water Repellent:

1. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Dry-Block.

2. Addiment Incorporated.

3. Master Builders, Inc.

4. Or equal.

C. CMU Clear Sealer and Graffiti Control

1. Prosoco. (Basis of Design)

2. Hydrozo.

3. Or equal.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUS)
A. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where indicated.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on back of test specimen.

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.

2. Block Pattern and Texture:
a. Exterior: Precision finish.
b. Interior: Precision finish.
c. Exterior Pool Free Standing Walls: Regalstone finish or equal.

3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.03 CLEAR SEATLER ONLY
A. Product: Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB Concentrate by Prosoco or equal.

1. Type: Siloxane.

2. 24-Hour Water Absorption per ASTM C140:
a. Heavy weight concrete block: 90%
b. Medium weight concrete block: 88%
c. Pre-cast concrete (sandblast finish): 83%

3. Moisture Vapor Transmission per ASTM E96:
a. Heavy weight concrete block: 90%
b. Precast concrete (sandblast finish): 88%

4. Reduction in leakage: 86% per ASTM E514.

5. Depth of Penetration: 1/16 to 1/4 inch.

6. Scaling resistance: 0 scaling after 50 cycles per ASTM C672.

2.04 CLEAR SEALER AND GRAFFITI CONTROL
A. Product: Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control II by Sure Klean Weather Seal (Prosoco) or equal.

1. Description: A clear-drying, water-based silicone emulsion for weatherproofing concrete block and other porous masonry materials. Protects interior and exterior masonry surfaces from graffiti attacks without altering the natural appearance. Also protects exterior walls exposed to normal weathering. Graffiti removal from treated surfaces is fast and easy using Defacer Eraser® Graffiti Remover. Easy to apply with low-pressure spray.

2. Technical Data:
a. Form: White liquid, slight odor.
b. Active Content: 6%.
c. Total Solids: 6% ASTM D 2369.
d. VOC Content: Less than <20 g/L Low Solids Coating.

2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

1. Products:
a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. d. Or equal.

2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CLEAR SEALER AND GRAFFITI CONTROL APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of sealer and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. Prevent streaking or uneven darkening finishes.

B. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of sealer on surfaces indicated for treatment using low- pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.

D. Immediately clean sealer from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by sealer application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by sealer application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION 04 22 11
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 1
SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members.

B. Structural steel support members.

C. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.

D. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Section 05 12 13 - Architecturally-Exposed Structural Steel Framing: Additional requirements for structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS).

D. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing.

E. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.

F. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.

1. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual.

2. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

3. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings.

4. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

5. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

6. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless.

7. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold Finished.

8. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

9. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

10. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.

11. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

12. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use.

13. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

14. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

15. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

16. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric].

17. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel.

18. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.

19. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

20. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.

21. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

22. ASTM E94/E94M - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination Using Industrial Radiographic Film.

23. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments.

24. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry.

25. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.

26. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions.

27. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions.

28. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination.

29. ASTM F959/F959M - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners, Inch and Metric Series.

30. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.

31. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.

32. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

33. AWS D1.4/D1.4M – Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

34. AWS D1.8/D1.8M - Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement.

35. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc.

36. SSPC SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.

37. SSPC SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.

38. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CBSC, Title 24, Part 2- California Building Code (CBC), 2022 edition. a. Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections.
b. Chapter 22 - Steel.

C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC ES), a subsidiary corporation of the International Code Council:

1. ICC ES Evaluation Reports, Materials, Products, Methods and Types of Construction, with current report (ESR).

D. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. UES Evaluation Service Reports (IAMPO R&T).

E. Research Council on Structural Connections

1. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners.
a. Individual items of structural steel shall be cross-referenced by grid location.

2. Indicate cambers.

3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

Indicate shop or field welds.

C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1. Submit Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test results from the manufacturer for applicable steel members and components.

D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis.

F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

G. Fabricator's Qualification Statement.

H. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172 or AISC Certified Fabricator.

I. Welding Procedures:

1. Submit welding procedures, indicating joint details and tolerances, preheat and interpass temperature, post heat treatment, single or multiple pass, electrode type and size, welding current, polarity, and amperes and roof treatment.
a. Project CWI shall review WPS and PQRs (if applicable) prior to submittal to the Architect.

2. Welding procedures shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.1, and it shall include the welding parameters recommended by the welding electrode manufacturer.

3. Refer to Structural Contract Drawings for weld testing and inspection.

4. Submit Charpy-V-Notch (CVN) Impact Test results from the manufacturer for applicable welds.

J. Sustainable Design Submittals

1. Materials & Resources Submittals: Refer to Section 018113 for additional information on LEED submittals.
a. Letter Template for MR Credit 2.1 and Credit 2.2: Letter template, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met. 1) Comply with Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal. b. Product Data and Certification Letter for MR Credit 4.1 and MR Credit 4.2: Indicate percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
c. Product Data for MR Credit 5.1 and MR Credit 5.2: For regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual and AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice.

B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also comply with Section 05 12 13.

C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS AC172 and Certified by AISC or City of Los Angeles.

E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

1. Licensed, certified, or otherwise approved in writing by the accepted fabricator.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. A. Storage: Protect steel members that will be stored on site for a prolonged period to protect from adverse effects of exposure to weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Angles and Channels: As specified in contract drawings.

B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: As specified in contract drawings.

C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: As specified in contract drawings.

E. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.

F. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled.

G. Pipe: As specified in contract drawings.

H. Shear Stud Connectors: As specified in contract drawings.

I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153/A153M Class C.

J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As specified in contract drawings.

K. Tension Control Bolts: Twist-off type; ASTM F3125/F3125M.

L. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F959/F959M at connections requiring high-strength bolts.

M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

N. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength as indicated in structural drawings.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 8,000 pounds per square inch.

O. Adhesive Anchoring Systems: As indicated in contract drawings.

P. Expansion Anchors: As indicated in contract drawings.

Q. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

R. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with the AISC Specification and CBC Chapter 22. Do not start fabrication until mill test reports have been accepted by Architect.

B. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

C. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

D. Holes shall be standard hole diameter, unless noted otherwise.

1. Holes for anchor bolts cast in concrete may be oversized in accordance with AISC Manual. Provide washer as indicated.

E. Welded Connections: Refer to Structural Contract Drawings for welding requirements.

1. Make welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.8.

F. Headed Welded Studs: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the shear connectors. Shop or field-weld headed welded studs, spaced as indicated, to beams and columns. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide complete fusion between end of the stud and the member without porosity or evidence of lack of fusion.

G. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal in accordance with ASTM A 123. Hot dip galvanize exterior ferrous steel. Perform galvanizing after fabrication (shearing, punching, bending, forming, assembling, and welding) in the largest units practicable. Remove projections, barbs, and icicles after galvanizing.

2.03 FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.

B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.

C. Prepare and paint steel as indicated in contract drawings and in conformance with 09 91 00 - Painting and 099713 - High Performance Steel Coatings

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. No structural steel materials may be used, fabricated, or furnished until written acceptance of quality control submittals is issued by the code enforcement agency.

1. Conduct a thorough material ID and mill certification review for steel products.

2. Provide identifiable steel per CBC 2202.
a. Unidentifiable steel shall not be permitted for use.

B. Conform to the inspection requirements of CBC Chapter 17 and the testing requirements of CBC 2204:

1. Special inspection of Structural Welding and bolting shall be per CBC 1705.2. a. Inspection of shop and field welding operations shall be made by a qualified welding inspector approved by the enforcement agency. The minimum requirements for a qualified welding inspector shall be as those for an AWS certified welding inspector (CWI), as defined in the provisions of the AWS QC1. All welding inspectors shall be as approved by the enforcement agency.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.

3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

C. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on final shop drawings.

D. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to accept bolts.

E. Back-up bars, dams, and runoff tabs shall be removed: the weld, base metal shall be ground flush and smooth per AWS.

F. High-Strength Steel Bolting: Perform in accordance with the AISC 303, AISC 36, and in accordance CBC Chapter 22.

1. Materials, method of installation and tension control, type of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall conform to ASTM F3125.

G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.

H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

I. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Steel members and erection shall conform with requirements of AISC 303 and AISC 360.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

END OF SECTION 05 12 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Steel Decking 05 31 00 - 1
SECTION 05 31 00

STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Acoustical roof deck.

B. Roof deck.

C. Composite floor deck.

D. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.

E. Bearing plates and angles.

F. Stud shear connectors.

G. Acoustical insulation in roof deck flutes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.

B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

D. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing
E. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing
F. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications

1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold Finished.

3. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

4. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

5. A 924-17 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

7. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

8. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

9. ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems.

10. SDI COSP - SDI Code of Standard Practice for Steel Deck.

11. SDI SD - Standard for Steel Deck.

12. SDI QA/QC - Standard for Quality Control and Quality Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CBSC, Title 24, Part 2- California Building Code (CBC), 2022 edition.

C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC ES), a subsidiary corporation of the International Code Council:

1. ICC ES Evaluation Reports (ESR) for Materials, Products, Methods, and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

D. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. IAPMO Uniform Evaluation Service (UES) Report for Materials, Products, Methods, and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Steel Decking 05 31 00 - 2
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, span direction, number of spans, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

F. SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS

2. Product Data and Certification Letter for MR Credit 4.1 and MR Credit 4.2: Indicate percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

3. Product Data for MR Credit 5.1 and MR Credit 5.2: For regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Currently a member in good standing of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI) or having a demonstrated capability of manufacturing steel structural decking in accordance with SDI standards.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Regularly engaged and specializing, for the preceding 5 years, in the installation of steel structural decking systems.

1. Specifically trained, licensed, certified, or otherwise approved in writing by the deck unit manufacturer.

C. Welders' Qualifications: Currently certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.3.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.

B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.

C. Do not over-load structure with material stored in concentrated areas.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Deck:

1. Verco Decking Inc.: www.vercodeck.com

2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com/#sle.

3. ASC Steel Deck, a division of ASC Profiles, Inc., www.ascsd.com.

2.02 STEEL DECK
A. Steel decks shall be in conformance with SDI Standards and have a current evaluation report (ICC or IAPMO).

B. Vented Decks: Deck units with concrete fill at areas to receive waterproofing membranes, roofing, elastomeric coatings, and other impermeable membranes shall be vented type.

1. Do not use vent tabs openings to support mechanical equipment.

C. Fabricate deck units lengths to span two or more bays where possible. Where deck cannot span two or more bays, submit location for review and acceptance by Architect.

D. Acoustical Deck: Non-composite type:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As specified in drawings.

2. Provide fluted or cellular deck type as indicated in drawings.

3. Structural Properties: As specified in drawings.

4. NRC Rating: As specified in drawings.

E. Metal Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As specified in drawings.

2. Structural Properties: As specified in drawings.

F. Composite Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As specified in drawings.

2. Structural Properties: As specified in drawings.

G. Acoustical Composite Deck: Composite type, fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As specified in drawings.

2. Provide cellular deck type as indicated in drawings.

3. Structural Properties: As specified in drawings.

4. NRC Rating: As specified in drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bearing Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel.

B. Stud Shear Connectors: Per section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.

C. Welding Materials: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M.

D. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type, minimum 1.1 lb/cu ft density; profiled to suit deck.

2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal wet concrete stops and cover plates shall be of same thickness as deck as indicated; finished same as deck.

B. Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings between decking and other construction, of not less than 12 gage sheet steel, unless otherwise indicated in drawings. Form to provide tight fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. Galvanization shall match the deck.

C. Roof Drain Pans: As indicated in drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Standards and Manufacturer requirements.

B. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units.

C. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing with-out warp or excessive deflection.

D. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing.

E. On steel supports provide minimum 2" bearing or as required by manufacturer, whichever is larger.

F. Locate deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

G. Connect deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute as specified in drawings.

H. Shore deck during concrete placement as required by manufacturer or drawings.

I. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.

J. Provide framing at deck openings as required on drawings.

1. Provide metal closure pieces and additional reinforcement as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of adjacent work.

K. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete.

Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.

L. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.

1. Welded stud connectors may be used to replace required deck fastening welds on a one- for-one basis.

M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide inspections of metal deck welds and mechanical fasteners per CBC Chapter 17 END OF SECTION 05 31 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00 - 1
SECTION 05 40 00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking.

B. Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.

C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Head and sill flashings.

D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

E. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing.

F. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

G. Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.

H. Section 09 22 36 - Lath.

I. Section 09 24 00 - Cement Plastering.

J. Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.

1. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. AISI S202 - Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing.

3. AISI S220 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Nonstructural Framing.

4. AISI S240 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structuring Framing.

5. AISI S400 - North American Standard for Seismic Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Systems.

6. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

7. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

8. ASTM A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

9. ASTM A 924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

10. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

11. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.

12. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

13. ASTM E488 - Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.

14. ASTM E1190 - Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members.

15. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

16. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

17. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

18. ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

19. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association Technical Guide (ICC ESR-3064P)

20. UL 2079 - Test for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CBSC, Title 24, Part 2- California Building Code (CBC), 2022 edition. Including but not limited to:
a. Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections.
b. Chapter 2210 – Cold-Formed Steel
c. Chapter 2211 – Cold-Formed Steel Light-Frame Construction.

C. Gypsum Association

1. GA 216 - Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

2. GA 302 - Installation of Screw-type Steel Framing members to Receive Gypsum Board.

D. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC ES), a subsidiary corporation of the International Code Council:

1. ICC ES Evaluation Reports (ESR) for Materials, Products, Methods and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

E. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):

1. IAPMO Uniform Evaluation Service (UES) Report for Materials, Products, Methods and Types of Construction with current report conforming to the applicable building code.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria and limitations.

1. Submit framing system manufacturer's standard published load to span charts with accompanying ICC report with members to be used indicated and showing compliance with drawings.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work.

1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout.
a. Coordinate stud and ceiling joist (including joist hangers and kickers) with MEP trades and indicate on shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention .

E. Welders' Qualification Statement: Welders' certificates in accordance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M and dated no more than 12 months before the start of scheduled welding work.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Welder Qualifications: Welding processes and welding operators qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M and dated no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing:

1. CEMCO: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle.

2. ClarkDietrich: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.

3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Framing Connectors and Accessories:

1. ClarkDietrich: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.

2. Simpson Strong Tie: www.strongtie.com/#sle.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs, Joists, and Tracks: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, C- or Sigma-shaped with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.

1. Gauge and Depth: As indicated on drawings.

2. Material:
a. 16 gage and heavier: ASTM A653, SS Grade 50, Minimum yield of 50,000 psi. b. 18 gage and lighter: ASTM A653, SS Grade 33, Minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G60/Z180 coating.

4. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A653 SS with G90 coating.

2.04 FASTENERS
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated and Drilled expansion bolts per drawings.

C. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M.

2.05 WALL SHEATHING
A. Gypsum Board Wall Sheathing: See Section 09 21 16.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

C. Deflection and Slip Clips: As indicated in drawings.

D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20 Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 00.

2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate straight, level and true, without warp or rack.

B. Fabrication tolerance to be in accordance with ASTM C955 C. When painted components are provided, provide manufacturer's standard factory applied primer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with AISI Code of Standard Practice for Cold-formed Steel Framing.

B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

C. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

D. Hold members firmly in position until permanently fastened.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00 - 4
B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners as indicated in the drawings. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.

C. Place studs at spacing indicated in drawings.

D. Cut right angle connections of framing components to fit squarely against abutting members.

E. Connect studs to tracks using as indicated in drawings.

F. Construct corners using minimum of four studs. Locate to provide surfaces for attachment of interior and exterior finishes.

G. Install headers and jambs at wall openings, door and windows as indicated in drawings.

H. Install load-bearing studs full length in one piece.

I. Splicing of studs is not permitted unless approved by the Architect.

J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.

K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.

L. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing.

M. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.

N. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation.

O. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS
A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.

C. Splicing of Joists is not permitted.

D. Place joists at spacing indicated in drawings and connect joists to supports as indicated in drawings.

E. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.

F. Locate joist end bearing directly over load-bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track.

G. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where indicated in drawings.

H. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHING
A. See Section 092116.

3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Install work in this section with tolerances in accordance to ASTM C1007.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not use gas cutting for field correction of fabrication without approval from Architect.

B. Perform inspections at all phases of steel stud construction.

C. Complete inspection, including steel stud members for bearing, reinforcing, and completeness of attachments, prior to applying loads.

3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Clean and touch up galvanized coatings at welded and abraded surfaces in accordance With ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION 05 40 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13 - 1
SECTION 05 52 13

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Stair railings and guardrails.

B. Free-standing railings at steps.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish.

B. Section 321313 - Concrete Paving

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022.

C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017.

D. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).

E. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Railings and handrails: CBC Section 11B-505:

1. Top of gripping surfaces of handrails shall be 34 inches minimum and 38 inches maximum vertically above walking surfaces, stair nosings, and ramp surfaces. Handrails shall be at a consistent height above such surfaces.

2. Clearance between handrail gripping surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be 1-1/2 inches minimum. Handrail may be located in a recess if the recess is 3 inches maximum deep and 18 inches minimum clear above the top of the handrail.

3. Handrail gripping surfaces shall be continuous along their length and shall not be obstructed along their tops or sides. The bottoms of handrail gripping surfaces shall not be obstructed for more than 20 percent of their length. Where provided, horizontal projections shall occur 1-1/2 inches minimum below the bottom of the handrail gripping surfaces.

4. Handrail gripping surfaces with a circular cross section shall have an outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches minimum and 2 inches maximum.

5. Handrail gripping surfaces with a non-circular cross section shall have an outside dimension of 4 inches minimum and 6-1/4 inches maximum, and a cross-sectional dimension of 2-1/4 inches maximum.

6. Handrail gripping surfaces and any surfaces adjacecnt to them shall be free of sharp or abrasive elements and shall have rounded edges.

7. Handrails shall not rotate within their fittings.

8. Handrail gripping surfaces shall extend beyond and in the same direction of stair flights and ramp runs in accordance with CBC Section 11B-505.10. Such extensions are not required for continuous handrails at the inside turn of switchback or dogleg stairs and ramps.

9. A 2 inch minimum high curb or a barrier shall be provided to prevent the passage of a 4 inch diameter sphere rolling off the sides of a ramp surface. Such a curb or barrier shall be continuous and uninterrrupted along the entire length of a ramp. CBC Section 11B-405.9.2.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13 - 2
B. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

C. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.

D. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.

E. Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B Schedule 40, galvanized finish.

B. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.

C. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth.

D. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.

E. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.

F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 FABRICATION
A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.

2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.

3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.

C. Install railings in compliance with ADA Standards for accessible design at applicable locations.

D. Anchor railings securely to structure.

E. Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth.

F. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION 05 52 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Decorative Metal 05 70 00 - 1
SECTION 05 70 00

DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Decorative Patterned Perforated Aluminum Panels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Supports.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Decorative metal shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with the 2022 California Building Code (CBC).

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Schedule and conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section. Attendees shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Contractor.

2. Manufacturer's representative.

3. Architect.

4. Owner's representative.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including description of materials, components, finishes, fabrication details, glass, anchors, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal panels

1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work.

2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal memeber, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages , an daccessory items.

D. Samples: Submit two (2)of each item below for each type and condition shown.

1. Sections of linear shapes.

2. Surface products, prepared on 6-inch square samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the work.

3. Samples of welded joints showing quiality of wokmanship, and color matching of materials.

E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

F. Installer's Qualification Statement.

1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Locate mock-up of decorative metal panels as directed by Architect . Mock-up to be made up of 2 to 3 individual panels side by side.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against damage during transit, delivery, storage, and installation at site.

B. Inspect materials upon delivery for damage. Repair damage to be indistinguishable from undamaged areas; if damage cannot be repaired to be indistinguishable from undamaged parts and finishes, replace damaged items.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Decorative Metal 05 70 00 - 2
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DECORATIVE PATTERNED PERFORATED ALUMINUM PANELS
A. Perforated Metal Panels: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, Allowy 3003-H-14, mill finish, .2500" Thick (1/4" Gauge), 1/2" Rouond Centers staggered per custom pattern.

1. Basis of Design Product: Arktura Graphic Perf Solutions Exterior System with a custom graphic. Graphic to be coordinated by Owner and Architect prior to creation of shop drawings by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's drawings and written instructions.

B. Anchor securely to structure.

C. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

3.03 PROTECTION
A. Repair damage to exposed finishes to be indistinguishable from undamaged areas.

1. If damage to finishes and components cannot be repaired to be indistinguishable from undamaged finishes and components, replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION 05 70 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 1
SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural dimension lumber framing.

B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.

C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

D. Sheathing.

E. Roof-mounted curbs.

F. Roofing nailers.

G. Roofing cant strips.

H. Preservative treated wood materials.

I. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

J. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Setting anchors in concrete.

B. Section 06 17 33 - Wood I-Joists.

C. Section 06 18 00 - Glued-Laminated Construction.

D. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing.

E. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.

F. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.

G. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Prefabricated roof curbs.

H. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a.

B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023a.

C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009 (Revised 2019).

D. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.

E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2021.

F. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; 2018.

G. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2021.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.

C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings.

B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.

2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER
A. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.

1. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 2,000,000 psi, minimum.

2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Roof Sheathing: Any PS 2 type, rated Structural I Sheathing.

1. Bond Classification: Exterior.

2. Span Rating: 48.

3. Performance Category: Equal to plywood thickness specified on structural drawings PERF CAT.

B. Wall Sheathing: Any PS 2 type.

1. Bond Classification: Exterior.

2. Grade: Structural I Sheathing.

3. Span Rating: 24.

4. Performance Category: Equal to plywood thickness specified on structural drawings PERF CAT.

5. Edge Profile: Square edge.

C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes.

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end.

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.

G. Provide bridging at joists in excess of 8 feet span as detailed. Fit solid blocking at ends of members.

H. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.

3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

C. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation.

B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing.

1. At long edges provide solid edge blocking where joints occur between roof framing members.

2. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.

B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 4
C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board.

1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.

2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs.

3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.

4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.

3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

3.09 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.

2. Do not burn scrap on project site.

3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.

4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Architectural Wood Casework 06 41 00 - 1
SECTION 06 41 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Hardware.

C. Preparation for installing utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 61 16 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for casework.

C. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2022.

B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.

C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0; 2016.

D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.

E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

F. WI (CCP) - Certified Compliance Program (CCP); Current Edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.

1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.

2. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

3. Include certification program label.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.

2. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.

B. Quality Certification:

1. Comply with AWI (QCP) woodwork association quality certification service/program in accordance with requirements for work specified in this section: www.awiqcp.org/#sle.

2. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades specified.

3. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.

4. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.

5. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance with specified requirements.

6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

C. Operable parts for all accessible casework shall comply with CBC Section 11B-309.

1. Provide tab pulls or touch latches at all accessible casework.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

C. Cabinets:

1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

3. Finish - Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Decorative laminate

4. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.

5. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.

6. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.

7. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.

8. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 - Overlay; flush overlay.

9. Cabinet Design Series: As indicated on drawings.

10. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 psf.
a. Deflection: L/144.

11. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.

12. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.

13. Drawer Side Construction: Multiple-dovetailed.

14. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 PANEL CORE MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: Composite panel composed of cellulosic particles, additives, and bonding system; comply with ANSI A208.1.

1. Grade: M-2; moisture resistance: MR10.

2. Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Basis of Design: Wisonart LLC, refer to finish schedule on drawings.

2. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle.

3. Panolam Industries International, Inc; Nevamar Standard HPL: www.panolam.com/#sle.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications.

C. Provide specific types as indicated.

1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated.

2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, color as selected, finish as indicated.

3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as indicated, finish as indicated.

4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.

2.05 COUNTERTOPS
A. Solid Surface Countertops: Specified in Section 123600

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.

B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

C. Glass: Type A, see Section 08 80 00.

D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations.

F. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

G. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

2.07 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as indicated for quality grade specified.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

C. Countertop Support Brackets: Fixed, L-shaped, face-of-stud mounting.

1. Materials: Steel; T-shape cross-section.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, powder coat. b. Color: Black.
c. Height: 18 inches.
d. Support Length: 18 inches.
e. Width: 1 inch.

D. Vanity Brackets: Fixed, ADA-compliant

1. Material and Shape: Steel
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat. b. Color: White.

2. Products:
a. A&M Hardware, Inc ; ADA Vanity Brackets: http://www.aandmhardware.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Drawer and Door Pulls: Tab pulls, satin chrome finish, 4" typical per drawings..

F. Keyed Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.

1. Provide locks at all cabinets; keyed per room.

G. Cabinet Catches:

1. Type: Magnetic catch.

H. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.

2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade.

3. Mounting: Side mounted.

4. Stops: Integral type.

5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Accuride International, Inc; Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides: www.accuride.com/#sle. b. Grass America Inc; Ball Bearing Slide System: www.grassusa.com/#sle. c. Hettich America, LP; Quadro: www.hettich.com/#sle.
d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides:
www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle.
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

I. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) self-closing type, with concealed self close adapter , steel with satin finish.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Grass America Inc; Institutional Hinges: www.grassusa.com/#sle. b. Hettich America, LP; Sensys: www.hettich.com/#sle.
c. Rockford Process Control, Inc. .
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

J. Elbow Catches: BHMA A156.9, B03023; coordinate with locks and latches at pairs of doors; active leaf shall have lock and inactive leaf shall have elbow catch. .

2.08 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.

Prime paint cut edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated.

B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

D. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane.

B. Insulation, flat and tapered. (At New Building B)
C. Vapor retarder.

D. Deck sheathing. (At New Building B, TPO over existing coverboard at Existing Building A) E. Flashings.

F. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, roofing expansion joints, and walkway pads.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Product requirements for acoustical insulation for deck flutes, for placement by this section.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.

C. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood cant strips.

D. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets.

E. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Roof drains.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.

B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2022.

C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2017.

D. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014.

E. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2013.

F. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011 (Reapproved 2019).

G. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; Current Edition.

H. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; 2007.

I. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual; 2017.

J. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2005.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners
C. Shop Drawings: Include Roof Plans, Sections, Details, and attachments to the other work.

Including the following:.

1. Layout and thickness of insulation.
3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 54 00 - 2

2. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

3. Flashing details at penetrations.

4. Tapered insulation sthickness and slopes.

5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for the mechanically fastend roofing systems.

6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field of roof locations.

7. Roof coverboard layout.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inches in size illustrating Roof membrane and flashing , of colors selected by Architect..

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.

G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

H. Installer's Qualification Statement.

I. Specimen Warranty: For approval.

J. Warranty Documentation:

1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with warranty conditions for waterproof membrane.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at least three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact.

B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

C. Ensure storage and staging of materials does not exceed static and dynamic load-bearing capacities of roof decking.

D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.

E. Provide Safety Data Sheets (SDS) at the project site at all times during transportation, storage, and installation of materials.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.

D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.

E. Do not allow grease, oil, fats, or other contaminants to come into direct contract with membrane.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 54 00 - 3
B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that shows manufacturing defects within 10 years after installation.

C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.

1. Warranty Term: 20 years.

2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.

3. Exceptions are not Permitted:
a. Damage due to roof traffic.
b. Damage due to wind speed greater than 56 mph but less than 90 mph.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane Roofing Materials:

1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle.

2. GAF: www.gaf.com/#sle.

3. Versico, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials Inc; VersiWeld TPO:
www.versico.com/#sle.

4. Basis of Design: Tremco Roofing & Maintenance, Inc.: www.tremcoroofing.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation:

1. BASF Corporation; BASF Neopor GPS: www.neopor.basf.us/#sle.

2. Carlisle SynTec; SecurShield Insulation: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane Roofing Materials:

1. Product: Basis of Design: manufactured by Tremco Roofing & Maintenance:
www.tremcoroofing.com

2. Substitutions: See Section01 60 00-Product Requirements.

3. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M, sheet contains reinforcing fabrics or scrims.
a. Thickness: 45 mil, 0.045 inch, minimum.

4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible.

5. Solar Reflectance: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3-year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council.

6. Color: White.

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended and approved by membrane manufacturer.

D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.

2.03 DECK SHEATHING AND COVER BOARDS
A. Cover Board: Polyisocyanurate (ISO) board insulation, complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 4 - Faced with coated or uncoated polymer-bonded glass fiber mat facers on both major surfaces of the core foam. This product is used at a maximum thickness of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), and the following characteristics:

1. Compressive Strength: 110 psi.

2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch.

3. Board Thickness: 1/2 inch.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Basis of Design: Tremco Roofing & Maintenance: www.tremcoroofing.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.04 INSULATION
3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 54 00 - 4
A. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289.

1. Classifications:
a. Type II:
1) Class 1 - Faced with glass fiber reinforced cellulosic felt facers on both major surfaces of core foam.
2) Compressive Strength: Classes 1-2-3, Grade 2 - 20 psi (138 kPa), minimum.

2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch.

3. Board Thickness: 0.5 inch.

4. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness thickness required to meet R- value shown on the drawings.; fabricate of fewest layers possible.

5. Board Edges: Square.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Company; _____: www.dowbuildingsolutions.com. b. GAF; EnergyGuard Polyiso Insulation: www.gaf.com/#sle. c. Versico Roofing Systems; SecurShield Insulation: www.versico.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Prefabricated Flashing Accessories:

1. Corners and Seams: Same material as membrane, in manufacturer's standard thicknesses.

2. Penetrations: Same material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard cut-outs, rigid inserts, clamping rings, and flanges.

3. Sealant Pockets: Sme material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard accessories, in manufaturer's standard configuration.

4. Pressure Sensitive Cover Strips: 6 incheswide, 45 mil, 0.045 inch thick, non-reinforced TPO membrane laminated to 35 mil, 0.035 inch thick cured synthetic rubber with pressure sensitive adhesive.

5. Pressure Sensitive Cover Strips: 6 inches wide, 45 mil, 0.045 inch thick, non-reinforced TPO membrane laminated to 35 mil, 0.035 inch thick cured synthetic rubber with pressure sensitive adhesive.

6. Miscellaneous Flashing: Non-reinforced TPO membrane; 80 mil, 0.080 inch thick, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths.

B. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering.

C. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.

D. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

E. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.

F. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

G. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

H. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard, clear, solvent-based cleaner.

I. Edgings and Terminations: Manufacturer's standard edge and termination accessories.

J. Walkway Pads: Suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually distinctive from roof membrane.

1. Composition: Asphaltic with mineral granule surface or Roofing membrane manufacturer's standard.

2. Size: As indicated.

3. Surface Color: White or yellow.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 54 00 - 5
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify deck is supported and secure.

C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.

E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicable requirements.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer.

D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.

E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.

3.03 VAPOR RETARDER AND INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE
A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge.

B. Attachment of Insulation:

1. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and FM (AG) Factory Mutual requirements.

2. Embed second layer of insulation into full bed of adhesive in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.

C. Cover Boards: Mechanically fasten cover boards in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and FM (AG) Factory Mutual requirements.

D. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding layer.

E. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes.

F. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.

G. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches.

H. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.

3.04 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.

B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.

C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate per manufacturer's recommended rate..

Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.

D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.

E. At intersections with vertical surfaces:

1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement City Project No. - 4742 City of Carlsbad 2nt Plan Check Submittal - 05/01/2024
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 54 00 - 6

2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.

F. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. Locate all field splices away from low areas and roof drains. Lap upslope sheet over downlope sheet.

G. Daily Seal: Install daily seal per manufacturers instructions at the end of each work day.

Prevent infiltration of water at incompleteflashings, terminations, and at unfinished membrane edges.

3.05 FINISHING UNBALLASTED SURFACES
A. Install walkway pads. Space pad joints to permit drainage.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection.

B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work.

3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.

B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.

END OF SECTION 07 54 00
3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 1
SECTION 07 62 00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule.

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022.

B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022.

C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022.

D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023.

E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2023.

F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

G. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014.

H. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products; 2020.

I. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.

J. ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2015a (Reapproved 2021).

K. ASTM D4479/D4479M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2018).

L. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2018).

M. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook; current edition.

N. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 2
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239 inch) thick base metal.

B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage, (0.0239) inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.

1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 20 gage, (0.032 inch) thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.

1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system.

2. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B749, 0.047 inch minimum thickness; UNS Number L51121.

E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 alloy, soft temper, 28 gage, (0.0156 inch) thick; smooth No. 4 - Brushed finish.

2.02 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A. Gutters: SMACNA (ASMM) Rectangular profile. 20 ga. minimum.

B. Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated.

C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) requirements.

2. Gutter Supports: Straps.

3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

D. Downspout Boots: Schedule 40 galvanied steel with 0.25 inch wall thickenss.

E. Seal metal joints.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.

B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178/D2178M, glass fiber roofing felt.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.

D. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

E. Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D4479 Type I.

F. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant.

G. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material.

H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels, and seal top of reglets with sealant.

C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit; secure in place with lead wedges; seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where permitted..

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

D. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact, and after soldering wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.

F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with concealed fasteners.

G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots, and grout connection watertight.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.

B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 62 00
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 1
SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.

C. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.

D. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.

E. Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

C. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.

D. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Field painting.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

B. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

C. SDI: Steel Door Institute.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2022.

C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2023.

D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2020.

E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023.

F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2023.

G. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2023.

H. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames; 2016.

I. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.

J. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Current Edition.

K. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.

L. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.

M. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2017.

N. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2014.

O. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2022.

P. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2022.

Q. SDI 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2023.

R. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

S. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontial- edge details and metal thicknessess.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preprations for hardware.

5. Details of each differenct wall opening condition.

6. Details of anhorages, joints, field splices and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops and glazing.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 3 inch by 5 inch in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience.

C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.

2. Mesker, dormakaba Group: www.meskeropeningsgroup.com/#sle.

3. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.

4. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.

3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.

4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.

5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.

6. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard.

7. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.

1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

2. Door Core Material: Polystyrene, 1 lbs/cu ft minimum density. a. Foam Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard board insulation with maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 75, and maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84, and completely enclosed within interior of door.

3. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 6.0 minimum, for installed thickness of polystyrene.

4. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 71 00.

C. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:

2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements.

3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.

D. Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Model 1 - Full Flush.

2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests").

3. Temperature-Rise Rating (TRR) Across Door Thickness: In accordance with local building code and authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR). a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

5. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction in compliance with requirements.

6. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch, nominal.

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Frame Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.

2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.

D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated ____ inch, maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.

2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.

E. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

2. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 4 inch, maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.

3. Frame Metal Thickness: 14 gage, 0.067 inch, minimum.

F. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door.

G. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Fixed, with profile similar to jambs.

H. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

I. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.

J. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.

K. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inch high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.

L. Frames Wider than 48 inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

2.05 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components ; factory- installed.

1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR) listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.

2. Style: Standard straight slat blade.

3. Louver Free Area: 50 percent.

4. Fasteners: Exposed, tamper proof fasteners.

B. Door Window Frames: Door window frames with glazing securely fastened within door opening.

1. Size: As indicated on drawings.

2. Frame Material: 18 gauge, 0.0478 inch, galvanized steel.

3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

4. Glazing: 1/4" thick, tempered glass, in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, factory installed.

D. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

E. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 7100.

F. Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping, steel with electroplated zinc finish.

G. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout / plaster grout is prohibited.

H. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.

I. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.

E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.

F. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 80 00.

G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 43 13 - 1
SECTION 08 43 13

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.

B. Infill panels of metal and glass.

C. Aluminum doors and frames.

D. Weatherstripping.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.

B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site; 2015.

B. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2015.

C. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2014.

D. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2021.

G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2021.

H. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

I. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 (Reapproved 2021).

J. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2023).

K. ASTM E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors; 2002 (Reapproved 2018).

L. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2015 (Reapproved 2023).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, infill panels, glazing materials.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 43 13 - 2
E. California Compliance Labeling and Certifications: Provide labeling and certifications complying with the California Energy Code Section 116.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements.

G. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage.

H. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

I. Installer's Qualification Statement.

J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.

D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING
A. Front-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:

1. Basis of Design: Arcadia TC470 Series.
a. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2-1/4 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions.

2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS
A. Wide Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken:

1. Basis of Design: Arcadia TC470 Series.

2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions.

2.03 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT
A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.

2. Finish: High performance organic coatings.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 43 13 - 3
b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.
c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

3. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.

4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials.

2. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 12 psf.

3. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 psf pressure differential across assembly.

4. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 0.28 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.

1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.

2. Glazing Stops: Flush.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.

C. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.

1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide.

3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide.

4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide.

5. Glazing Stops: Square.

6. Finish: Same as storefront.

2.05 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

C. Sealant for Setting Thresholds: Non-curing butyl type.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

E. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00.

2.06 FINISHES
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 43 13 - 4
A. Superior Performing Organic Coatings System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat superior performing organic coatings system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent PVDF resin, and at least 80 percent of aluminum extrusion and panels surfaces having minimum total dry film thickness (DFT) of 1.2 mils, 0.0012 inch.

1. Manufacturers:
a. PPG Metal Coatings; Duranar: www.ppgmetalcoatings.com/#sle. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; SHER-NAR 5000: oem.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

C. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

2.07 HARDWARE
A. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, and threshold.

B. Other Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00.

C. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.

D. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.

E. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.

G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing.

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

I. Install operating sash.

J. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure.

K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria.

L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of storefront manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper installation of system and submit report.

B. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general testing and inspection requirements.

LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024
Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 43 13 - 5
C. Water-Spray Test: Provide water spray quality test of installed storefront components in accordance with AAMA 501.2 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes.

1. Perform a minimum of two tests in each designated area as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct tests in each area prior to 10 percent and 50 percent completion of this work.

D. Provide field testing of installed storefront system by independent laboratory in accordance with AAMA 503 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes.

1. Perform a minimum of two tests in each designated area as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct tests in each area prior to 10 percent and 50 percent completion of this work.

3. Field test for water penetration in accordance with ASTM E1105 with uniform static air pressure difference (Procedure A) not less than 8 psf. a. Leak defined as uncontrolled water penetration ouside of area with provisions to drain to exterior, or collected on surface of interior hoizontal framing member.

4. Field test for air leakage in accordance with ASTM E783 with uniform static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf.
a. Maximum allowable rate of air leakage is 0.09 cfm/sq ft.

E. Repair or replace storefront components that have failed designated field testing, and retest to verify performance conforms to specified requirements.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 08 43 13
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
This page intentionally left blank
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 1
SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware
B. Section excludes:

1. Windows

2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets .

3. Signage

4. Toilet accessories

5. Overhead doors
C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 "General Requirements" sections for Allowances, Alternates, Owner Furnished Contractor Installed, Project Management and Coordination.

2. Division 06 Section ''Rough Carpentry''

3. Division 06 Section ''Finish Carpentry''

4. Division 07 Section ''Joint Sealants'' for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section.

5. Division 08 Sections:
a. ''Metal Doors and Frames''
b. ''Flush Wood Doors''
c. ''Stile and Rail Wood Doors''
d. ''Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames''
e. ''Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts''
f. ''Stainless Steel Doors and Frames''
g. ''Special Function Doors''
h. ''Entrances''

6. Division 26 ''Electrical'' sections for connections to elect rical power system and for low- voltage wiring.

7. Division 28 ''Electronic Safety and Security'' sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control system and fire alarm system.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. UL LLC

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies

2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Ass emblies

3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies

4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 2

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule

2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware

3. Keying Systems and Nomenclature

4. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
C. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

2. NFPA 80 – 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protecti ves

3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

4. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

5. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
D. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI A117.1 – 2017 Edition – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

2. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.3 1 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

3. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 - Recommended Practices for Ke ying Systems

4. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors

5. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames
E. 2022 California Building Code

1. Chapter 11B – Accessibility to Public Buildings, Public Accommod ations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Submittal Procedures.

2. Prior to forwarding submittal:
a. Review drawings and Sections from related trades to verify compatibility with specified hardware.
b. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically i dentify on submittals: deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Submit technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:
a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:
1) Details of interface of electrified door hardwar e and building safety and security systems.
2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring.
4) Risers.

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 3

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Archit ect, submit production sample of requested door hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.
a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule:
a. Submit concurrent with submissions of Product Da ta, Samples, and Shop Drawings.

Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work critical in Project construction schedule.
b. Indicate complete designations of each item requ ired for each opening, include:
1) Door Index: door number, heading number, and Arc hitect's hardware set number. 2) Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finis h of each hardware item. 3) Name and manufacturer of each item.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Location of each hardware set cross-referenced t o indications on Drawings. 6) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and c odes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for hardware.
8) Door and frame sizes and materials.
9) Degree of door swing and handing.
10) Operational Description of openings with electr ified hardware covering egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections.

5. Key Schedule:
a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule that includes levels of keying, explanations of key system's function, key symbols used, and door numbers controlled.
b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 ''Recommended Practices fo r Keying Systems'' as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.
c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review p repared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.
d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, ha rdware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts an d one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as dir ected by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Provide Qualification Data for Supplier, Install er and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

2. Provide Product Data:
a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on t ypes and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
b. Include warranties for specified door hardware.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in acco rdance with Division 01 and include:
a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and a djustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 4
b. Catalog pages for each product.
c. Final approved hardware schedule edited to refle ct conditions as installed. d. Final keying schedule
e. Copy of warranties including appropriate referen ce numbers for manufacturers to identify project.
f. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening co nnected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts.

E. Inspection and Testing:

1. Submit written reports to the Owner and Authorit y Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) of the results of functional testing and inspection for:
a. Fire door assemblies, in compliance with NFPA 80 .
b. Required egress door assemblies, in compliance w ith NFPA 101.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications and Responsibilities:

1. Supplier: Recognized architectural hardware supp lier with a minimum of 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. Supplier to be recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturer of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in the Project ’s vicinity and be available at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.

2. Installer: Qualified tradesperson skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware with experience installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality as indicated for this Project.

3. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type o f door hardware from single manufacturer.

B. Certifications:

1. Fire-Rated Door Openings:
a. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings th at complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Provide only items of door hardware that are lis ted products tested by UL LLC, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

2. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies:
a. Provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105
b. Comply with the maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/s q. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

3. Electrified Door Hardware
a. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Accessibility Requirements:

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 5
a. Comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in ''REFERENCES'' article 087100, 1.02.D3 herein for door hardware on doors i n an accessible route. This project must comply with all Federal Americans with Disability Act regulations and all Local Accessibility Regulations.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings

1. Keying Conference
a. Incorporate keying conference decisions into fin al keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:
1) Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose o f each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.
2) Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3) Requirements for key control system.
4) Requirements for access control.
5) Address for delivery of keys.

2. Pre-installation Conference
a. Review and finalize construction schedule and ve rify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed b y other trades. c. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for e lectrified door hardware. d. Review sequence of operation for each type of el ectrified door hardware. e. Review required testing, inspecting, and certify ing procedures. f. Review questions or concerns related to proper i nstallation and adjustment of door hardware.

3. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference:
a. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide s ecure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. Promptly replace products damaged dur ing shipping.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identif ication coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer's original packaging.

C. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

D. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware deliver ed to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

E. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marri ng, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. Protect produc ts against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent.

F. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control syst em for subsequent delivery to Owner.

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 6

1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-rece ssed door hardware with floor construction.

Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, fr ames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardwa re, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufactur er agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within published warranty period.

1. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operati on due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

2. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substant ial Completion, for durations indicated in manufacturer's published listings.
a. Mechanical Warranty
1) Locks
a) Schlage L Series: 3 years
2) Exit Devices
a) Von Duprin: 3 years
3) Closers
a) LCN 4000 Series: 30 years
b. Electrical Warranty
1) Locks
a) Schlage: 1 year
2) Exit Devices
a) Von Duprin: 1 year
3) Closers
a) LCN: 2 years

1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish complete set of special tools required f or maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

B. Turn over unused materials to Owner for maintena nce purposes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
LPA Project No. - 4742
2nd Plan Check Submittal – 05/01/2024
24 3rd Plan Check Submittal - 08/12/2024
Carlsbad Monroe Street Pool Replacement LPA Project No. - 19027.10 City of Carlsbad 1st Plan Check Submittal - 01/29/2024

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 7
A. Approval of alternate manufacturers and/or produ cts other than those listed as ''Scheduled Manufacturer'' or ''Acceptable Manufacturers'' in the individual article for the product category are only to be considered by official substitution request in accordance with section 01 25 00.

B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicate d in ''Acceptable Manufacturers'' is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer's product.

C. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to fin ished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operat ion and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fabrication

1. Provide door hardware manufactured to comply wit h published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. provide screws according to manufacturer ’s recognized installation standards for application intended.

2. Finish exposed screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible fo r hardware units exposed when door is closed. Coordinate with “Metal Doors and Frames ”, “Flush Wood Doors ”, “Stile and Rail Wood Doors ” to ensure proper reinforcements. Advise the Architect where visible fasteners, such as thru bolts, are required.

B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop p lates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to m atch adjacent door hardware material.

C. Cable and Connectors:

1. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide ea ch item of electrified hardware and wire harnesses with number and gage of wires enough to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

2. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices.

3. Provide through-door wire harness for each elect rified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies.

2.03 HINGES
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product:
a. Ives 5BB series
B. Requirements:

1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1.

2. Provide five knuckle, ball bearing hinges.

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 8

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and includ ing 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless s teel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches ( 114 mm) high

4. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (9 14 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

5. 2 inches or thicker doors:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless stee l, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

6. Adjust hinge width for door, frame, and wall con ditions to allow proper degree of opening.

7. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

8. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provi de hinge pins as follows:
a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins
b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins
c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins
d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-remova ble pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

9. Provide hinges with electrified options as sched uled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires enough to accommodate elec tric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified.

2.04 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer:
a. Ives
B. Requirements:

1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless-steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of d oor height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2.05 COORDINATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer:
a. Ives
B. Requirements:

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 9

1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head.

2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers, surface vertical rod exit device strikes, or other stop mounted hardware. Factory-prepared coordinator s for vertical rod devices as specified.

2.06 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product:
a. Schlage L9000 series
B. Requirements:

1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A1 56.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3-hour fire doors.

2. Indicators: Where specified, provide indicator w indow measuring a minimum 2-3/5-inch x 3/5 inch with 180-degree visibility. Provide messages color-coded using ANSI Z535 Safety Red with full text and/or symbols, as scheduled, for easy visibility. When applicable allows for lock status indication on both sides of the door.

3. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge stee l, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.

4. Provide lock case that is multi-function and fie ld reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to ''KEYING'' article, herein.

5. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1-inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.

6. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide switches and sensors integrated into the locks and latches.

7. Provide motor based electrified locksets that co mply with the following requirements:
a. Universal input voltage – single chassis accepts 12 or 24VDC to allow for changes in the field without changing lock chassis.
b. Fail Safe/Fail Secure – changing mode between electrically locked (fail sa fe) and electrically unlocked (fail secure) is field selectable without opening the lock case. c. Low maximum current draw – maximum 0.4 amps to allow for multiple locks on a single power supply.
d. Low holding current – maximum 0.01 amps to produce minimal heat, elimina te “hot levers ” in electrically locked applications, and to provide reliable operation in wood doors that provide minimal ventilation and air flow.
e. Connections – provide quick-connect Molex system standard.

8. (KEY OVERRIDE OPTION WHEN XL13-439 IS SPECIFIED IN HARDWARE SETS) Provide locks with a key override feature built into the chassis that allows the outside key to retract the deadbolt and/or latchbolt, overriding the inside thumbturn when it is being held in the locked position.

9. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless st eel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.
a. Provide levers that return to within 1/2 inch (1 3 mm) of door face. b. Vandlgard: Provide levers with vandal resistant technology for use at heavy traffic or abusive applications.

Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 10
c. Lever Design: 06A

2.07 PADLOCKS:

A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product:
a. Schlage KS Series

2. Scheduled Manufacturers and Products:
a. Best 11B Series
b. Sargent 758 Series
B. Requirements:

1. Provide padlocks with 1-inch (25 mm) shackle hei ght, unless noted otherwise, as specified.

2. Cylinders: Refer to ''KEYING'' article, herein.

2.08 EXIT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product:
a. Von Duprin 98 series
B. Requirements:

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware.

Carlsbad City CouncilSeptember 10, 2024

Carlsbad City Council
September 10, 2024